n w w

w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w li .u t.c w
w n
04/01/2021
-li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f t.c w p n w
w li .u n w -li .u
.u
ft
.c w p- w f w
n w li .u t.c w
p-
p- w ft w p n w lif
.c
INTEC GmbH

li .u n w -li .u t.c
ft
.c w p- w f w p n
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
-li .u .c w .u .c
ft
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p n
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w n -li .u

1/213
w p
Operating manual V2.0

ft w ft w p
Lift controller MLC 8000

.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n MLC 8000 w
-li
ft w
.u
.u .c w .u .c p-
n w li n w
Lift controller

p-
.u
ft
.c w p w lif
li ft w n w -li .u t.c
w f n
Operating manual
.u .c w
p-
.u t.c w p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f t.c w p n
w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
© 2020 INTEC GmbH Ingenieurservice. All rights reserved.
w
w

ft

This manual and the product described within are protected by Copyright rights under the w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

reservation of all rights for the INTEC GmbH Ingenieurservice. According to copyright laws,
ft
w

li
w

this manual may not be copied in whole or service engineer without written permission from
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

INTEC GmbH Ingenieurservice in part, except in the normal course of use of the product or
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

for creating backup copies. However, this exemption does not extend to copies that are
.c

w
p-

ft
w

created by third parties and sold to or in other manner transferred to. However, the entire
ift

li
w
.u

.c

material purchased (with all backup copies) can be sold to third parties, be handed over to
p-
w
w

ft

or provided on loan. According to the provisions of the Act, the production of a translation
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

also falls under the definition of copying.

p-

ft
w
ft

The INTEC GmbH Ingenieurservice accepts no responsibility or guarantee for the

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

content of this manual. It rejects all implied warranties of merchantability or eligibility

p-

ft

n
n

.u

for a particular purpose.

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft

The INTEC GmbH Ingenieurservice is not legally responsible for errors contained within or
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

for any indirect or consequential damages in connection with the transfer, performance, or
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

use of this manual. The INTEC GmbH Ingenieurservice reserves the right to revise this
n

.u
li
w
.u

manual from time to time without pre notice and to make changes to the content.
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

The operation is not allowed in the US and countries of similar laws.

n

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

2/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Version number:

-li
w
.u

.c

w
The present description is based on the software version 1.44s of the main board HSE.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
Due to new requirements in the lift control field, a continuous development of the lift

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
controller MLC 8000 is taking place. While compatibility with older software versions
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
will always be preserved, so that the present description stays also applicable to

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
newer or older versions of the control. There might be some features in newer
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

versions of this specification which are not included, as well as some features of this
.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

description which might not carried out yet in older control versions.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

3/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Frequently used abbreviations

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
General terms:

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
LC Landing call
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

AWG Absolute encoder Position measurement system that can measure

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

the actual position of the lift immediately after

p
w

ft
p

switching on; there is no reference travel required

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

In the lift controller MLC 8000, a measuring

w
w

p
w

w
system with magnetic tape and reading unit with
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
integrated CAN-bus interface is typically used.

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
CAN Controller Area Network In the lift controller MLC 8000 used bus system,
-li
w

w
w
w

with which the individual components are

p

f
n

-li
w
.u

interconnected
t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

COP Car Operation Panel Car operating panel

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

VVVF Variable Voltage Variable AC motor speed controller, used in modern lifts

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Frequency to control the main motor
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
ID Identifier Number that clearly identifies a module on the
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

CAN bus
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

CC Car call Car call

w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

LCD Liquid Crystal Display Type of graphical display

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
LED Light Emitting Diode
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
LS Light screen Light barrier
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

LOP Landing Operation Panel Outer panel

w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

SL Safety line (safety circuit)

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

Control modules and other modules:

w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ASE Antriebssteuereinheit drive control unit; PCB for controlling the drive
w

ft
w
w

ft

li
w

(e.g. VVVF) via the CAN bus

.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u

CBC CAN Bus Coupler see CBK; Designation is used only when using
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

the main board MCU

w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

CBK CAN Bus Koppler Assembly used to divide the CAN bus for large
n

li
w
.u

lifts or lift groups in several physically separate

.c

p-
w
w

ft

segments
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

4/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
CDU Car Distribution Unit see FVE; Designation is used only when using the

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
main board MCU

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
CPA CAN Positioning Adapter see PSE; Designation is used only when using
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

the main board MCU

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

DCU Drive Control Unit see ASE; Designation is used only when using
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

the main board MCU

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
DSE Diagnose- und Mobile handheld terminal for diagnostics and

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
Serviceeinheit w
service
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
ESE Etagensteuereinheit Name of a control assembly which is connected
-li
w

w
w
w

on shaft bus (CAN bus) for connection of landing

p

f
n

-li
w
.u

calls, special items / outputs or serves as a car

t.c

p
w

n
position indicator.
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

As ESE different modules can be used

t.c

w
w
w

f
n

- UEA

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

- LCI16
w

p
w

n
up

f
n

- MS3-C

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
- PMA
w

f
n

-li
w
f

- LCD-047
.u

t.c
-li

p
- LCD-057
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

FVE Fahrkorb- Verteilereinheit Car unit (usually on the car roof or in the car
w

p
w

ft
w

operating panel)
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

HHT Hand-Held Terminal see DSE; Designation is used only when using w
.u

.c
li
w

w
the main board MCU
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
HSE Hauptsteuereinheit Main assembly of the lift controller; usually
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

installed in the control cabinet

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

LCI16 Liquid Crystal Indicator LCD Module with CAN-Bus connection and 8
.c

p-
w
w

ft

inputs / outputs (can be used in the cabin or

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

outside the panel)

.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

LCM Lower Correction Magnet Switching point (magnet) of the lower pre-limit
w
p-

ft

switch LPLS; Designation is used only when

n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

using the main board MCU

w

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w

LCU Landing Control Unit see ESE; Designation is used only when using
p-

ft
n

.u

the main board MCU

li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

LPLS Lower Prelimit Switch see VU; Designation is used only when using the
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

main board MCU

n

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

5/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
LSI Lower Signaler see SGU; Designation is used only when using

-li
w
.u

.c

w
the main board MCU

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
MCU Main Control Unit Main assembly of the controller; usually installed
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
in the control cabinet

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

MS3-C Car position indicator 2 digits + arrow (dot matrix

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

5 * 7) with CAN-Bus connection and 7 inputs /

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

outputs (can be used in the cabin or outside the

p
w

ft
p

panel). Not used for new installations

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
MSI Middle Signaler see SGM; Designation is used only when using
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
the main board MCU

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
PCU Panel Control Unit see TSE; Designation is used only when using the

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
main board MCU
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

PMA Punktmatrixanzeige Car position indicator 2 digits + arrow (dot matrix

t.c

p
w

n
5 * 7) with CAN-Bus connection and 8 inputs /
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

outputs (can be used in the cabin or outside the

t.c

w
w
w

f
n

panel)

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

PSE Positionssteuereinheit Positioning (adapter assembly between

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
incremental and CAN bus)
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
PSU Position Supervising Unit Absolute position measurement unit with safety
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

functionality
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

RSI Reference Signaler see SGE; Designation is used only when using
w

p
w

ft
w

the main board MCU

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

SDS Slow Down Switch see SGV; Designation is used only when using w
.u

.c
li
w

w
the main board MCU
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
SGE Signalgeber zum Eichen Reference or calibration switch SGE; is used as
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

reference point for the positionin

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

SGM Signalgeber mitte Center door zone switch (also leveling switch,
.c

p-
w
w

ft

usually bistable magnetic switches, inductive or

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

capacitive switches)
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

SGO Signalgeber oben upper door zone switch (usually bistable

w
p-

ft

magnetic switches, inductive or capacitive

n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

switches)
w

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w

SGU Signalgeber unten lower door zone switch (usually bistable magnetic
p-

ft
n

.u

switches, inductive or capacitive switches)

li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

SGV Signalgeber Verzögern Slow down switch to switch to levelling speed if

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

arriving the target floor

n

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

SRU Safety Relais Unit Safety assembly for advanced door opening and
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

6/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
re-levelling with open car doors; is used only

-li
w
.u

.c

w
when using the main board MCU

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
TSE Tableausteuereinheit Name of a control assembly which is connected
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
on control bus (CAN bus) inside the car panel for

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
connection of car calls, special items / outputs or
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

serves as a car position indicator.

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

As TSE different modules can be used

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

- UEA

p
w

ft
p

- LCI16
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

- MS3-C

w
w

p
w

w
- PMA
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
- LCD-047

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w - LCD-057
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
UCM Upper Correction Magnet Switching point (magnet) of the upper pre-limit
-li
w

w
w
w

switch UPLS; Designation is used only when

p

f
n

-li
w
.u

using the main board MCU

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

UEA Universelle Ein-/Ausgabe- Universal input / output module; control Module

t.c

w
w
w

f
n

Baugruppe with CAN-Bus connection and 8 inputs / outputs;

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Available in 2 versions:
w

p
w

n
up

f
n

- UEA.1: inputs / outputs to 0V switching

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
- UEA.2: inputs / outputs to 24V switching
w

f
n

-li
w
f

The UEA can be used depending on the

.u

t.c
-li

p
configuration for various purposes:
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

- As ESE for connection of landing calls

.u

t.c

t.
w
w

- TSE to connect the car calls

w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

- As ASE for controlling the drive unit

w

p
w

ft
w

- As PSE for connecting an incremental

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

encoder via CAN

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
UPLS Upper Prelimit Switch see VO; Designation is used only when using the
p-

ft
w

main board MCU

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

USI Upper Signaler see SGO; Designation is used only when using
.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

the main board MCU

w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

VU Vorendschalter unten lower prelimit switch; used as reference point for

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

the positioning
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

VO Vorendschalter oben upper prelimit switch; used as reference point for

w
p-

ft

the positioning
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

7/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

p
Table of content

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
0. Preliminary............................................................................................................ 10
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

1. Introduction ........................................................................................................... 11

ft
w

p
ft

n
1.1 Operation of the Lift Controller MLC 8000 and Parameter Input ..................................11

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
1.2 Keyboard commands .................................................................................................12

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
1.3 Password protection (Code) ........................................................................................14

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w
1.3.1 Menu code ............................................................................................................14

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u
1.3.2 Parameter code ....................................................................................................14

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
1.3.3 Exceptions ............................................................................................................14
p

.u
-li
w
.u

1.4 Hardware encoding .....................................................................................................15

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
2. Menu structure...................................................................................................... 16

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

3. Commisioning ....................................................................................................... 81

p
w
w

f
n

.u
3.1 Setup Mode .................................................................................................................81

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
3.2 Testing of individual input and output functions ...........................................................81
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
3.3 Setup of car doors .......................................................................................................81

t.c
-li
w

w
w
3.4 Teach-in ......................................................................................................................81
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

3.4.1 Starting normal operation for lifts with magnetic switch positioning .......................81
t.c

p
w

3.4.2 Teach-in procedure by lifts with incremental encoder ............................................82

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

3.4.3 Teach-in procedure by lifts with absolute encoder .................................................82

t.c

w
w
w

f
3.5 Flush correction...........................................................................................................83
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

3.5.1 Flush correction by car operation panel COP ........................................................83

w

p
w

n
up

3.5.1 Flush correction by keypad of HSE or handheld terminal DSE ..............................84

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

4. Error diagnosis ..................................................................................................... 84

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

4.1 General procedure for troubleshooting ........................................................................84

.u

t.c
-li

p
4.2 LED indicators .............................................................................................................84
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

4.3 Initial troubleshooting using state display 1 .................................................................85

.u

t.c

t.
w
w

4.4 Error stack ...................................................................................................................85

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

4.5 Error counter ...............................................................................................................92

w

p
w

ft
w

4.6 Behavior of the controller in case of error ....................................................................92

p

.u
li
w
.u

.c

4.7 Internal error counter ...................................................................................................93

p-

w
w
w

ft

4.8 Error warning...............................................................................................................93

w
.u

.c
li
w

4.9 Hardware test of the individual controller boards .........................................................93

w
p-

ft
w

4.10 Troubleshooting at CAN bus faults ............................................................................95

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
4.11 Apparent errors by anti misuse detection or special functions ...................................97
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

4.12 Troubleshooting at the interface to external components...........................................97

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

4.13 Fault output ...............................................................................................................98

w
ift

li
w
.u

4.14 Error messages .........................................................................................................99

.c

p-
w
w

4.15 Error messages during teach-in procedure ..............................................................119

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

5. Travel commands and Door commands via keypad (HSE or handheld terminal)121
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

5.1 Travel commands ......................................................................................................121

n

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

5.2 Door commands by keypad .......................................................................................122

w
p-

ft

5.3 Door commands by inspection switches ....................................................................122

n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

6. Test of the safety functions of the lift control (Technical inspection) ................... 123
w

ft
w
w

ft

li
w

6.1. Automated Test ........................................................................................................123

.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

6.1.1 Testing the safety circuit for moving with open doors ..........................................123
w

ft
n

.u
li
w

6.1.2 Testing the trip time monitoring ...........................................................................124

.u

.c

p-

w
w

6.1.3 Testing the final limit switches .............................................................................124

w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

6.1.4 Overspeed ..........................................................................................................125

w
p-

ft
w

6.1.5 Testing the safety gear ........................................................................................125

n

li
w
.u

.c

6.1.6 Testing the motor brake ......................................................................................126

p-
w
w

ft

6.1.7 Testing of A3 and down valve .............................................................................127

n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

8/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
6.1.8 Testing the monitoring inputs for motor brake (roped lifts) or valves (hydraulic lifts)

-li
w
.u

.c

w
....................................................................................................................................127

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
6.1.9 Testing the contactor monitoring (Contactor drop off control) ..............................128

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
6.1.10 Uncontrolled movement ....................................................................................129
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
6.1.11 Testing the Deceleration monitoring circuit ........................................................129

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
6.2. Conventional Test ....................................................................................................129
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

6.2.1 Testing the safety circuit for moving with open doors ..........................................129
.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

6.2.2 Testing the trip time monitoring ...........................................................................130

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

6.2.3 Testing of parking trip to lowest floor by hydraulic lifts .........................................130

p
w

ft
p

6.2.4 Testing of emergency light ..................................................................................130

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

6.2.5 Testing the final limit switches .............................................................................130

w
w

p
w

w
6.2.6 Testing the traction (driving ability) ......................................................................131
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
6.2.7 Testing the speed monitoring ..............................................................................131

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
7. Parameters of lift controller ................................................................................. 132
.u

t.c

w
w

p
7.1 Saving parameters ....................................................................................................132
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

7.2 Parameter backup .....................................................................................................132

w
w
w

7.3 Changing parameters ................................................................................................132

p

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

7.4 Changing of parameter “Floor name” ........................................................................133

w

p
w

n
7.5 Transferring parameters when replacing defective modules ......................................133
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
7.6 Parameters for freely programmable inputs and outputs ...........................................134

w
w

f
n

7.7 Functions for free programmable inputs and outputs .................................................137

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

7.7.1. Input functions....................................................................................................137

w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
7.7.2. Output functions .................................................................................................151

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
8. Setting the node ID ............................................................................................. 165
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

9. Group control ...................................................................................................... 165

t.c
-li

p
w

9.1 Principle of Group control ..........................................................................................165

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

9.2 Parameter synchronization within a lift group ............................................................167

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

10. State display ..................................................................................................... 168

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
10.1 State display 1 (General overview) ..........................................................................168

p
w

ft
w

.u
10.2 State display 2 (Door state) .....................................................................................169
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
10.3 State display 3 (Timer values) .................................................................................170
w
w

ft

w
.u

10.4 State display 4 (Position and Speed) .......................................................................170

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

10.5 State display 5 (Emergency evacuation) .................................................................171

w

li
w
.u

Appendix 1. Technical specifications ...................................................................... 172

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

Appendix 1.1 Module MCU .............................................................................................172 w

n

.u

.c
li
w

Appendix 1.2 Module HSE ..............................................................................................176

.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

Appendix 1.3 Module FVE 1.1 / FVE 2.1 .........................................................................181

li
w
.u

.c

p-

Appendix 1.4 Module FVE 1.2 .........................................................................................187

w
w

ft

Appendix 1.5 Module UEA ..............................................................................................192

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

Appendix 1.6 Module PMA ..............................................................................................194

w

ft
w
ft

li
w

Appendix 1.7 Module LCI16 ............................................................................................197

.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

Appendix 1.8 Module TVE ...............................................................................................199

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

Appendix 1.9 Module CBK ..............................................................................................202

.u

.c

p-

ft
w

Appendix 1.10 Module SRU ............................................................................................203

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

Appendix 1.11 Module LCD-047 .....................................................................................205

p-
w
p-

ft

Appendix 1.12 Module LCD-057 .....................................................................................208

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

Appendix 1.13 Handheld terminal ...................................................................................212

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

9/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
0. Preliminary

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
The main board of the lift controller MLC 8000 exists in 2 different versions:

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

- HSE board with integrated safety circuit and socket for modem or Ethernet interface

p
w

ft

n
p

- MCU board without integrated safety circuit

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
The two boards also differ from each other in the external form; the functioning and

.u

.c
-li
w

p
integrated application are still largely identical.

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
Depending on the main board used the name of the other boards differ from each other ,as
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

well as some specific control switches.

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

Mainly the board HSE is used, so that the present description relates also to this board.

w
w

p
w

n
Basically, the present description is also applicable to control systems in which the MCU

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
board is used.

w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

Following is a list with the various names by the HSE or MCU:

w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
Board Main board HSE Main board MCU

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

Car board FVE CDU

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

Boards in the car operating panel TSE PCU

t.c
-li

p
w

n
Boards in landing operating panel ESE LCU
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Safety circuit Integrated safety SRU

t.c

w
w

f
n

relays KH5, KH6 and

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

KH7
w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
Drive control board ASE DCU
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
Positioning unit PSE CPA
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

Diagnosis unit DSE HHT

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

CAN bus coupler CBK CBC

p

.u
li
w
.u

Double-AWG (for moving with open door) AWG2 SAF

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

AWG2 adaptor board (Double-AWG) PSE2 POS2 w

.u

.c
li
w

Lower prelimit switch VU LPLS

w
p-

ft
w

Switching point of lower prelimit switch VU LCM

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

Upper prelimit switch VO UPLS

w

ft

w
n

.u

Switching point of upper prelimit switch VO UCM

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

Door zone switch (Level switch) SGM MSI

ift

li
w
.u

Lower door zone switch SGU LSI

.c

p-
w
w

ft

Upper door zone switch SGO USI

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

Slow down switch SGV SDS

p-

ft
w
ft

Correction switch (Reference switch) SGE RSI

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

Relay on the main board KH11-16, KH41-42 KM1-8

p-

ft

n
n

.u

Emergency relay on the main board KH31 KM-CA

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

Inputs of the main board E1-8 (BR, U2, MAX, IM1-8

w

ft

li
w
.u

U1, MIN, RHEin,

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

Auf, Ab)
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

10/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
1. Introduction

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
1.1 Operation of the Lift Controller MLC 8000 and Parameter Input
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
The operation of the lift controller MLC 8000 can be handled either from the keypad and LCD

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
display located on the HSE, or with a mobile handheld terminal DSE.

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u
HSE and handheld terminal have an LCD display with 16 * 4 characters and a keypad using

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
the following keys:
p

.u
-li
w
.u

- Number keys 0 to 9
t.c

w
w
- Cursor keys ↑ and ↓

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

- ENTER key ↵

p
w
w

f
n

- ESC key

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
The handling of the HSE and the handheld terminal is very simple. With the cursor keys ↑

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
and ↓ a menu item in the LCD display can be selected. Pressing ENTER ↵ the selected
w
w

f
n

-li
w
menu item starts. Either a function is activated or a submenu is called.
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

With the ESC key a function may be terminated or you can leave a submenu.
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

The entire menu structure is described in more detail in the section "Menu structure".
w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

The handheld terminal DSE is connected via the CAN bus to the lift controller and can be

w
w

f
n

inserted and withdrawn during operation. Currently located on both the HSE and on the FVE

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
appropriate connectors. Additionally, it is possible to insert at any point corresponding

p
w
p

f
n

.u
adapters on both the control bus and on the shaft bus.
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

After connecting the hand-held terminal to the lift controller first following display appears
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

(example):
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

** INTEC GmbH **
n

w
.u

.c
li
w

Lift controller
w
p-

ft
w

Connect to HSE
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
1 2 3
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
If the handheld terminal was connected to the control bus (e.g. FVE), then only the number 1
p-

ft
w
ift

is displayed on the bottom line. Pressing ENTER ↵ the connection is made to the lift
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

controller. Further operation of the hand-held terminal is then identical to the operation of the
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li

HSE.
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c

If the hand-held terminal was connected into the shaft bus of an lift group, then the group
li

p-
w
p-

ft

numbers of all HSE modules will appear within the group. By pressing the corresponding
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

number button it can be selected, with which lift of the group the connection has to be done
.c

p-

ft
w
w

(by pressing ENTER ↵ always the lift 1 is selected).

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u

If, after you connect the handheld terminal, in the bottom line no number appears, then the
li
w
.u

.c

p-

CAN data transmission between handheld terminal and lift controller is disturbed.
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

If the CAN connection gets disturbed while working with the handheld terminal, then following
w

li
w

display appears on the LCD screen of the handheld terminal :

.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

11/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
Lost connection

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
to HSE!

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
Continue with
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
any key!

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
By pressing ENTER ↵, the connection, if possible, can be reestablished.
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

1.2 Keyboard commands

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
For experienced users, there is next to the menu the so called keyboard commands used in
.u

t.c

w
w
the operation of the lift controller, where a lot of time can be saved.

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

Certain functions or menu items can be selected by pressing the keyboard commands
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

directly, by passing the menu structure.

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

Each keyboard command consists of a sequence of digits that are acknowledged by

w
w
w

pressing the ENTER key ↵. The time interval between 2 consecutive keys must not be

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

greater than 3 seconds, otherwise the previously operated keys are invalid and the key
w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
command must be started from the beginning. Operated key will be shown in the LCD

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
display on the bottom left
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

The keyboard commands can be used anytime, regardless of what is shown on the LCD

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

display of the lift controller or the hand-held terminal.

t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Only in a few menu items or functions the keyboard commands are disabled, for example, in
w

p
w
p

the menus "Travel commands" and "Door commands" or the "Hardware test".
f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

The following table lists all the keyboard commands .

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
Command Description Notes
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
0↵
w

State display 1 Main screen

w

ft

w
.u

1↵
.c
li
w

Open door 1
w
p-

ft
w

2↵ Open door 2
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
3↵
p-

w
Open door 3
w
w

ft

4↵ w
n

.u

Close all doors

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

5↵
w

ft

Enable /Disable door lock

w
ift

li
w
.u

6↵
.c

Enable /Disable landing calls

p-
w
w

ft

7↵ Test drives on / off

n

.u

.c
li
w

8↵
.c

Menu "Travel movement"

p-

ft
w
ft

9↵
li
w

Save all parameters

.u

.c
li

p-
w

00↵
p-

Menu "Basic settings"

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

01↵
.u

"Out of service" indication on/off

.c

p-

ft
w
w

02↵
ft

Trip to inspection start position

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

03↵
w

Start Load mode

p-

ft
n

.u

000↵ Menu "General parameters"

li
w
.u

.c

p-

001↵
w

Menu "Timer parameter"

w

ft

w
.u

.c

012↵
li
w

Menu "Error stack"

w
p-

ft
w

013↵ Menu "Error count"

n

li
w
.u

.c

015↵
p-

Clear error stack

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

12/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Command Description Notes

-li
w
.u

.c
016↵

w
Clear error count

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
017↵

.c
-li
w
Clear operating time counter
.c

ft
w
018↵

p
Clear trip counter
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

100↵ Start Teach in trip

p
w

ft

n
p

1xx↵ e.g.: 105 ↵ = Car call floor 5

n

.u
Car call for floor xx

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

115 ↵ = Car call floor 15

w
(for all doors)

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
1xxy↵ e.g.: 1051 ↵ = Car call floor 5, door 1

.u
Car call for floor xx,

.c
-li
w

p
w
1152 ↵ = Car call floor 15, door 2

ft
Door y
p

.u
-li
w
.u

2xx↵ e.g.: 205 ↵ = Landing call up floor 5

t.c

Landing call up direction for floor

w
w

p
w

n
xx 215 ↵ = Landing call up floor 15

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
(for all doors) Landing calls without door are only valid for the

p
w
w

f
n

.u
actual lift of a lift group.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
2xxy↵ Landing call up direction for floor e.g.: 2051 ↵ = Landing call up floor 5,
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
xx
-li
w

door 1

w
w
2153 ↵ = Landing call up floor 15,
w

Door y
p

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

Door 3
w

p
w

n
Landing calls with door are handled by each lift
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
of a group.

w
w

f
n

3xx↵ Landing call down direction for e.g.: 305 ↵ = Landing call down floor 5

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

315 ↵ = Landing call down floor 15

w
floor xx

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
(for all doors)

t.c
-li
w

Landing calls without door are only valid for the

t.c

w
w

actual lift of a lift group.

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

3xxy↵ e.g.: 3052 ↵ = Landing call down floor 5,

t.c
-li

Landing call down direction for

w

p
w

floor xx
p

door 2
f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

3153 ↵ = Landing call down floor 15,

t.c

Door y

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
door 3 w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
Landing calls with door are handled by each lift

p
w

ft
w

.u
of a group.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
400↵
w

Hardware test HSE

w

ft

w
.u

401↵
.c
li
w

Bus node test FVE, ASE and

w
p-

ft
w

PSE
n

li
w
.u

402↵
.c

.
Hardware test TSE boards
p-

w
w
w

ft

403↵ Hardware test ESE boards w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
404↵
p-

Test group connection

ft
w
ift

li
w

405↵
.u

Switch to English language

.c

p-
w

406↵
w

ft

Switch to German language

n

.u

.c
li
w

407↵
.c

Switch to Dutch language

p-

ft
w
ft

420↵ Switch to Russian language

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

490↵
w

Menu "Technical check"

p-

ft

n
n

.u

5xx↵ e.g.: 505 ↵ = Emergency call floor 5

.c
li
w

Emergency call floor xx

.u

.c

p-

ft
w

(for all doors) 515 ↵ = Emergency call floor 15

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

6xx↵ e.g.: 605 ↵ = Advanced call floor 5

p-

Advanced call floor xx

w
p-

ft

(for all doors) 615 ↵ = Advanced call floor 15

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

7xx↵ e.g.: 705 ↵ = Special call floor 5

w

Special call floor xx

w
w

ft

715 ↵ = Special call floor 15

.u

(for all doors)

.c
li
w

w
p-

8xx↵ e.g.: 805 ↵ = Output 5 (KH15) activated

ft
w

Set output HSE

n

li
w

• 1: Relay KH11
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

• 2: Relay KH12
n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

13/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Command Description Notes

-li
w
.u

.c
• 3: Relay KH13

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
• … to Relay KH42

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w
• 9: Output KH5

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
e.g.: 905 ↵ = Output 5 (KH15) deactivated
-li

Switch off output HSE (siehe

p
w

ft

n
9xx↵
p

above)
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
1.3 Password protection (Code)

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

The lift controller MLC 8000 has a two-stage access protection (code number). If access

w
w

p
w

protection is enabled, then when you start the menu structure (pressing ENTER ↵) you will

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
be asked to enter a numeric code.

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Within the control 2 different access codes (Menu code, parameter code) can be stored.
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
These can be activated, changed or disabled (by setting the codes to 0) in the menu item

t.c
-li
w

w
w
"Change password".
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

After entering a valid password access for 15 minutes is enabled, then the access is blocked

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

again and the State display 1 (main screen) is displayed.

t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

The access time of 15 minutes starts again when:

w

p
w

n
up

- a key is pressed on the HSE or the hand-held terminal

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

- the lift is in "Teach in mode"

w
w

f
n

- The menu item "Travel commands" was started

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
- The menu item "Door command" was launched

p
w
p

f
n

.u
- The menu item "Basic settings" was started
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

1.3.1 Menu code

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
If the menu code is activated, the menu structure can only get started if the corresponding
w
w

ft

code has been entered. w

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w

1.3.2 Parameter code

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

If the parameter code is activated, the following actions can be performed only when the
w
p-

ft
w
ift

appropriate code has been entered:

li
w
.u

.c

p-

- Changing parameters
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

- Teach-in trip
.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft

- Door movements with keyboard

w
ft

li
w

- Drive movement on keyboard

.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

- Basic settings
ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

- Group synchronization
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

1.3.3 Exceptions
p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u

Regardless of the preset or entered code following actions can always be carried out:
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

- Display of state images

w

ft

w
.u

- Input of calls over short commands

.c
li
w

w
p-

- Start menu "Technical check" with short command 490 ↵

w

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

14/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w li .u t.c w
w n
04/01/2021
-li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f w p n w

interchanged.
li .u t.c w
w ft w p- n w
-li
f w
.u
.u .c w .u t.c p-
n w li n w

the error stack HSE).

p- ft
.c w p w lif
INTEC GmbH

li .u n w -li .u t.c
ft
.c w p- w f w p n
n w .u t.c w
1.4 Hardware encoding

w li n -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
-li
ft w n w -li .u .c
.c w
p- w f t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f t.c w p n w
w li .u n w -li .u
w p
Operating manual V2.0

ft w

15/213
ft w p
Lift controller MLC 8000

.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
ft w
.u
.u .c w .u .c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.u .c w
p-
.u t.c w p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w .c
In the default state, the entire system is unprotected and control modules can be freely

w n w
-li
f .u n w
w
p-
.u t.c w p
li w
modules with identical hardware encoding can work together in an lift controller. Thus, if, for
Upon customer request all control modules can be fitted with a custom specific coding. Only

w n
module will be "ignored" completely (it appears the error message "Wrong Code TSE xxx" in

-li
w p
example, a TSE board was connected with other hardware encoding of such the system, this

ft w ft w
.u .c w .u .c
n w
-li
f w p n w
p-
li .u t.c w w
ft w p n w
-li .u
.c w .u
ft
.c w p-
n w
-li
f w p n w
. t. w lif
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
2. Menu structure

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

.c
-li

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Parameter
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

General paramet.
.c

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

.u
No. Lift number (for information only)

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

ft
Lift type Rope / Hydraulic

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
Bottom floor Bottom floor

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Top floor Top floor
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Group size Number of lifts per group (1 … 8)

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
w

n
Number of lift within a group (1 … 8)
w

Group number
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Car door numb. Car door number (1 … 3)

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n
Main floor

.u
Main floor

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Park floor Park floor
.c

p
w

n
w

(Note: Starting with version 1.32z this parameter is in a separate submenu

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
"Special parameter" - "Parking trip")
.u

t.c

w
w
w Collecting control / Single call control
Type

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
Yes: Using of separate safety unit SHM with CANopen

t.c
Safety unit
-li
w
t.c

p
w

n
w

Setup ready This value is set to "Yes" if setup is completed. As long as this value is set
p

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

to "No", all position values are invalid and the lift does not handle trips (only
.u

t.c
-li

w
electrical recall operation and inspection possible)
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
Push control If set to "Yes" lift is working as a "Push control", ie, the lift only goes as long
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

as special pushs are pressed (also called Deadman control).

t.c

p
w

n
w

Note: As of version 1.36m HSE, this parameter is in the submenu "special

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

parameters" - "Push control "

.u

t.c
-li

w
w If set to "Yes" special "call tables" (see "Special parameter") are activated. If
Call config.

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

the lift arrives a floor by a landing call, only car calls enabled for this landing
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

call ("Call table" will be handled.

t.c

p
w
w

A maximum of 5 different call configurations can be set. Switching between

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

the Call configurations occurs only when all doors are closed and (if
t.c
-li
w

w
w available), the presence sensor signals "Car empty" signals that no one is

p
w

n
w

w
lif

inside the car anymore.

n

.u

.c
w
.u

In principle, up to 5 "logical" lifts can be created for one "real" lift , in which
.c

w
p-

ft
w

only floors or entrances within this "logic" lift can be approached.

w

ft

li
w
.u

The function can be activated by this parameter as well as with an input

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
16/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
("Special function" - "Call configuration").

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
(Note: as of version 1.41s this parameter is displayed in a separate
.c

p
w

ft

n
w submenu "Special parameter" - "Call configurat.")

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Doors locked By setting "Yes" never 2 car doors open at the same time.

.u

.c
-li

ft
Note: Inside the menu item "Special parameters" it is possible to select,

p
w

ft

n
p

whether the "door lock" is also active in the various Special drive modus .

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Ref.run speed Choice of driving speed for reference run to the SGE magnet or the prelimit
.c

p
w

ft
w
switch

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u
Ref. floor Last floor before reference switch SGE when driving in the upward direction

.c
-li
w

ft
w
(= floor below the reset switch)

p
w

ft

n
w

Ref. floor ↑

-li
w
Last floor in upward direction before top prelimit switch VO
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Ref. floor ↓

w
Last floor in downward direction before bottom prelimit switch VU
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
Behavior of the lift when the car is between 2 floors (eg after switching on,
-li
w

Diving

w
w

p
w
after a failure, etc.):

n
w

w
f
n

.u
VO / VU: The lift always moves to one of the prelimit switches (VO/VU).

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Next Floor: The lift always travels to the nearest floor

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Decel.↑↓ Only for positioning with Switches (see next parameter below):

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

- SGV: Lift is slowing down to arrival speed v0 in top and bottom floor

w
.c

p
w
depending on state of Slow down switch SGV

n
w

w
f
n

.u
- VO/VU: Lift is slowing down to arrival speed v0 in top and bottom floor

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
always in the moment VO or VU is switching on.

w
w

p
w

f
n
Pos.type Type of positioning:

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

- CAN Encoder: (Incremental encoder with CAN interface)

t.c

p
w
- Encoder (Encoder mechanical connected to car).

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
This setting must also be selected if the motor encoder is used for the

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

position, but the door zone is not additionally monitored by "real" door zone

w
w

p
w

f
n
switch SGO / SGU
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

- Motor encoder (using the motor encoder; always in connection with "real"
.u

t.c

p
w
door zone switches SGO / SGU)

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
- Switch (position via a magnetic switchs)

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

- Absolute (Absolut encoder

w
w

p
w

f
n
- Double-AWG (Double absolute encoder for driving with open doors without
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

any additional magnetic switch)

.u

t.c

p
w
- Limax33CP: Special absolute encoder with integrated safety functions
w

p
w

f
n

.u
(e.g. replacement of final limit switchs)

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Adv.door op. Advanced door opening (door opening while lift is arriving) (yes/no)
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
v Adv.door Speed limit to open door if lift is arriving (advanced door opening)

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

w
Position to open door if lift is arriving (advanced door opening)

ft
Pos.Adv.door
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
17/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Releveling Re-levelling with open doors (yes/no)

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Rel.at Call Re-levelling if new call available (yes/no)

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
Handling of new landing call in actual floor:

.c
LC mode

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

- reopen: re-opens the door if new landing call is pressed

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
- ignore: if the lift already starts door closing while the new landing call was
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
presses the lift controller will continue closing the door and handle this call
.u

.c

p
w

ft
later
w

p
w

ft

.u

.c
- other lift (only for group of lifts): If a new landing call is pressed another lift

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

of the group will go to this floor even if there is alrady a lift with open doors

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

located in this floor

p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Vane length Length of the door zone (area where the door zone switch SGM is turned
.u

t.c

p
w
on)
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
Only if this parameter is entered correctly, the control values can specify in
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
mm or mm/s (the lift controller calculates the relation between resolution of

p
w

n
w

incremental encoder and "real length in mm)

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
If the vane length is not identical in all floors, the vane langth on the 2nd
.u

t.c

w
w
w floor length must be entered here.

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

Cl.calls[mm] Distance in mm from the target floor, in which the calls for this floor will be
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
cleared (lamp off). When set to "0", the calls are cleared in the moment the
.c

p
w

n
w

lift starts slowing down

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

(Note: Clearing a call before the lift slows down is not possible.)
t.c

w
w
Level zone ↑
w Position in mm above floor level where the lift starts re-levelling (only if

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

parameter "Relevelling" is set to "yes")

n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Note: When positioning via the motor encoder and magnetic switches
t.c

p
w

n
w

the leveling zone is formed by the switch SGO / SGU. This parameter is of

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

no significance in this case.

t.c
-li

w
w
Level zone ↓ See above; position below floor level

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Resolution of position encoder related to travel distance in mm.

.u

Incr./m
t.c

p
w

n
w

This parameter is automatic calculated during set-up trip (setting of

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
parameter "Vane length" - see above - must be correct!)
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
If the lift has only 2 floors this parameter must be calculated and set
w

p
w

f
n
manually.
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

v nominal Rated speed ( for speed monitoring)

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
v relevel Relevelling speed ( for speed monitoring)
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

For manual evacuation through brake opening via UPS in case of power

w
v brake
w

p
w

n
w

failure (machine room-less lifts): Upon reaching this speed the control
p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

allows the mechanical brake to come up again ("interval braking" for speed
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
limit)
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
18/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Top limit Distance of the upper final limit switch above top floor. This parameter is

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
used exclusively for the detection of errors if the lift is on the top floor and
.c

p
w

ft

n
w the primary safety circuit (SL1) fails. If the lift is above this position, it

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
detects error "SL final limit"; otherwise at fault "SK missing". This parameter

.u

.c
-li

ft
is used for hydraulic lift, which has to stop operation if the lift was at top final

p
w

ft

n
p

limit.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Bot.limit See above; position of bottom limit switch

.c

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

If set to "Yes", according to EN81-20 the shaft door safety circuit is checked

n
SL door test

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
after each trip (if the doors are completely openend).
-li
w

ft
w

p
For this the safety unit for door zone bypass is activated for a short time and

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
so power is switched to safety circuit input SL4.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
At the same time safety circuit input SL3 must not have power, otherwise

p
w
w

p
w

f
n
the safety circuit shaft door is defective or bypassed. In this case the lift

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
controller goes out of operation and sets the error message " SL shaftdoor
-li
w

w
w

p
w
on".

n
w

w
f
n

.u
SC3/SC4 test Test of shaft door safety circuit: If SL3 is open longer than 3 seconds, but

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
SL4 is closed at the same time, than lift controller sets error message „SL

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
shaftdoor on“ (maybe safety circuit is overbridged).

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Note: This test only works well with a special wiring developed for russian

w
.c

p
w
market.

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
Descr. For these parameters, values or text may be entered for informative

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
purposes.

w
w
Manuf.

p
w

f
n
Thus, for example, better assignment can be done when the parameter set

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li

Year
w

is stored on the PC.

t.c

p
w

n
w

Set.date
p

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Traction

w
w

p
w

f
n
Nom.Ld.[kg]
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Timer parameter

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Parktime[s] If the lift is not used for this time the lift will go to the specified parking level.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

(Note: as of version 1.32z these parameters aredisplayed in a separate

w
w

p
w

f
n
submenu "Special parameter" - "Parking trip")
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Triptime[s] Monitoring of travel movement according to EN81

.u

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Time to turn off the car light, when the lift parks with closed doors at a floor

-li
w
Carlight[s]
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w Time until door closing when the lift has approached a floor due to a car call
Waitt.CC[s]

p
w

n
w

w
lif

(not for main floor; see below)

n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
Waitt.LC[s] Time until door closing when the lift has approached a floor due to a landing
p-

ft
w
w

call (whether simultaneously a car call existed).

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
19/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
(not for main floor; see below)

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w Waitt.nC[s] If the lift is on a floor and there is no further call, then the lift closes after this
.c

p
w

ft

n
w time the doors after that time (unless "Parking with open door" is set; see

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Door parameters)

.u

.c
-li

ft
(not for main floor; see below)

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
Wt.CC Main[s] Time until door closing when the lift has approached a floor due to a car call
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

(just for main floor; see above)

.c

p
w

ft
w
Time until door closing when the lift has approached a floor due to a landing

p
Wt.LC Main[s]
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u
call (whether simultaneously a car call existed).

.c
-li
w

ft
w
(just for main floor; see above)

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
Wt.nC Main[s] If the lift is on a floor and there is no further call, then the lift closes after
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

this time the doors after that time (unless "Parking with open door" is set;
t.c

p
w
w

p
see Door parameters)
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
(just for main floor; see above)

t.c
-li
w

w
w
Doorstop[s] Time Door Stop push stays active until pressed

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Wt.Start[ms] Start delay after closing of the safety circuit of the shaft doors
.u

t.c

w
w
("Debouncing")
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Wt.door[s] Max. w aiting time for safety circuit doors when starting

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w

n
w

Errdelay[s] Waiting time between the occurrence of an error and further reactions of the
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
lift controller (call canceling, setting the fault relay, sending an error
.u

t.c

w
w
message via the remote data transmission, etc.)
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
Doort.Err.[s] Time until door closing in error state.
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

If set to ‘0’ the doors will always stay open in error state.
t.c

p
w

n
w

Drive parameter

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

General

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

Drive Selection of interface between lift controller and drive unit:

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

- Standard: control of the drive only via relays of the main board
t.c

p
w

n
w

- CAN-Lust: Inverter "Lust" connected by CAN bus

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

- CAN-ASE: Using an ASE board (UEA) as interface to lift controller

.u

t.c
-li

w
- CAN-Open: Inverter interface according to CANopen Lift (DSP 417)
w

p
w

f
n
p

- Em.RS485: Emerson inverter connected by RS485

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Star/D. [ms] Changeover time star / delta (hydraulic lifts)

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

Delay between switching on running contactors and setting control signals

.u
Startdel[ms]

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

(only if parameter "Sign.delayed" (see below) is set to "Yes" at the same

-li
w

w
w

p
w

time)

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
Brakedel[ms] Delay between setting control signals and switching on brake contactor

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w

Brakeoff[ms] Delay between switching off the control signals and brake contactor
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
20/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Offdel. [ms] Delay between switching off brake contactor and main / direction contactor

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Stopdel.[ms] Delay between switching off all contactors and direction + enable signals

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
Waiting time after shutdown of all control signals and contactors until the

.c
Stop [ms]

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

next action (e.g. opening the doors or starting a new journey)

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Sl.start[ms] Delay when switching on the slow-start contactor if switching from fast to
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
slow. If, for example, used for pole-changing motors where in the supply line
.u

.c

p
w

ft
of the slow winding-up resistors are connected.
w

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
If the lift starts directly at slow speed , then the starting contactor is

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
activated immediately.

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Contact.[ms] Max. waiting for contactor supervising input (while switching on and
p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
switching off contactors)
.u

t.c

p
w
w Max. waiting for brake supervising inputs (while switching on and switching
Braket. [ms]

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

off the brake)

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Only if "Ready" signal from drive exist: Max. waiting time for "Ready" signal

w
Ready=1 [ms]

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Brake=1 [ms] Only if "Brake" signal from drive exist: Max. waiting time for "Brake" signal

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
Only if "Moving" (Speed > 0) signal from drive exist: Max. waiting time for
w Mov. =1 [ms]

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
"Moving" signal
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Brake=0 [ms] Only if "Brake" signal from drive exist: Max. waiting time for "Brake" signal
.c

p
w

n
w

of at trip end
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Ready=0 [ms] Only if "Ready" signal from drive exist: Max. waiting time for "Ready" signal
t.c

w
w
w of at trip end

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

Delay between activation of an error signal from the drive and response of
n

Error [ms]

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

the lift controller

p
w

n
w

No: main contactors and speed signals are activated at the same time

f
Sign.delayed
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Yes: speed signals are activated delayed (see above parameter "Startdel
t.c
-li

w
w
[s].)

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Pos.mode Special mode for lifts with CANopen drive, where the inverter selects the

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
optimum driving speed itself. Notably, the arrival behavior and travel time

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
are optimized, especially for short floors.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Other Requirements: Positioning with CAN open interface

t.c
-li

w
w

p
By Quick Start the motor is already energized and the brake is released
w

Quickstart

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
while the doors close. So the delay time is minimized during starting.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
For the function Quick Start a safety circuit for moving with open doors is

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

necessary.

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c

Note: While starting the movement the door lock bypass (safety circuit) is
-li
w

w
w

p
w

switched off. So it is necessary to adjust the parameter "Wt.start[ms]" (see

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
"Timer parameter" above) in a way, that the safety circuit of the doors is

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

really closed in the moment the door lock bypass is switched off; otherwise

ft
w
w

ft

the error "SL off trip" occurs.

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
21/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Qu.delay[ms] Waiting time between starting of door closing and starting the quick start

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
procedure (drive on).
.c

p
w

ft

n
w If the lift is equipped with a CANopen Lift door this parameter may be set to

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
0 (see also next parameter below).

.u

.c
-li

ft
Qui.door[mm] Only if the lift is equipped with CANopen lift doors: Door position where

p
w

ft

n
p

Quick start is activated

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Vent.time[s] Switch off delay of car ventilatorafter trip end

.c

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Delay time for relevelling [ms].

.u
Relev.[ms]

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Relevelling is only started if cabin is outside level zone for this time.

ft
w

p
w
So, a possible oscillation of the cabin is avoided at the flush position.

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
Only for CANopen lift drives:

t.c
Speeds

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
With this parameters the actual lift speed in mm/s is assigned to the

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
different functional speeds:

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Speed signals For all other drives:

w
w

p
w
With this parameters it is defined which speed signal outputs will be set for

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
the different functional speeds:

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
vRL Re-levelling speed
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

Arrival speed

.u
V0

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w
V1 Intermadiate speed 1 (for short floor distances)

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Intermadiate speed 2 (for short floor distances)
.u

V2
t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
V3 Nominal speed

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

vI Normal Inspection speed

t.c

p
w

n
w

f
vIS Slow Inspection speed
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Fast Electrical recall operation speed

w
vR
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

vRS Slow ( normal) Electrical recall operation speed

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Evacuation speed (UPS-Evacuation)

w
vEE(UPS)

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

vHu Lift with holding bolts: Up speed from holding bolts

.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
Lift with holding bolts: Down speed to holding bolts
w

vHd

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

vZ1 Additional intermadiate speed 1

.u

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

Additional intermadiate speed 2

f
vZ2
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Drive specific Menu item only for CANopen Liift drives: Here you can directly set

w
w

p
w

n
parameters of the drive (usually VVVF).
w

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

The meaning of each parameter is in the operating manual of the drive.

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
Read from drive The drive-specific parameters (see above) are each stored in both the drive
w
w

ft

and in the lift controller. For the operation of the lift, the parameters in the

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
22/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
drive and control need to be the same (synchronous) . If the parameters are

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
changed in the lift controller, then they are automatically sent also to the
.c

p
w

ft

n
w drive (synchronized). However, if you change parameters directly on the

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
CANopen lift drive, then the changes need to be transferred manually with

.u

.c
-li

ft
this menu item from the drive to the lift controller.

p
w

ft

n
p

If a CAN open drive has been replaced, then the drive parameters can be

-li
w
Write to drive
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

sent with this menu item to the new drive, ie, the drive must not be
.c

p
w

ft
w customized manually before.

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
In addition, this menu option is required if within the lift controller drive-

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
specific parameters (see above) were changed while the drive (VVVF) was

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
not switched on (not "available") .

w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Positions/Imp. All red marked parameters are automatically measured during the setup trip
t.c

p
w
w
and do not need to be changed.

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Dec./stop dist. Brake and stopping distances measured during teach-in trip

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
Dec. v3 ↑

w
Braking distance for speed v3 in the upward direction

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Dec. v3 ↓ Braking distance for speed v3 in the downward direction

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Dec. v2 ↑ Braking distance for speed v2 in the upward direction

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
Dec. v2 ↓

p
Braking distance for speed v2 in the downward direction

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w Dec. v1 ↑
.u

Braking distance for speed v1 in the upward direction

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n
Dec. v1 ↓ Braking distance for speed v1 in the downward direction

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Stop ↑ Stopping distance in the upward direction

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w Stop ↓
f

Stopping distance in the downward direction

.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
Dec.vZ2 ↑

n
Braking distance for speed vZ2 in the upward direction
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Dec.vZ2 ↓
t.c

w
Braking distance for speed vZ2 in the downward direction

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
Dec.vZ1 ↑

-li
w
f

Braking distance for speed vZ1 in the upward direction

.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
Dec.vZ1 ↓
w

f
Braking distance for speed vZ1 in the downward direction

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

Minimum distance between start and target floor to start with nominal speed

w
Min.Dist.v3

p
w
w

v3
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

Min.Dist.v2 Minimum distance between start and target floor to start with reduced speed
t.c
-li
w

w
w
v2

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
Min.Dist.v1 Minimum distance between start and target floor to start with reduced speed

.c
w
.u

.c

w
v1
p-

ft
w
w

ft

Minimum distance between start and target floor to start with reduced speed
n

Min.Dist.vZ2

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
23/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
vZ2

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w Min.Dist.vZ1 Minimum distance between start and target floor to start with reduced speed
.c

p
w

ft

n
w vZ1

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
vI ↑ Braking distance for inspection speed vI in the upward direction

.u
Dec.

.c
-li

ft
w

p
w
vI ↓

ft

n
Dec. Braking distance for inspection speed vI in the downward direction
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

vI ↑
.c

w
Stopping distance for inspection speed in the upward direction

p
Stop

ft
w

p
w

ft

.u
vI ↓

.c
-li
w
Stopping distance for inspection speed in the downward direction

.u
Stop

.c
-li
w

ft
w

p
vN ↑

ft
Stopping distance for relevelling speed in the upward direction

n
w

Stop
p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

vN ↓ Stopping distance for relevelling speed in the downward direction

t.c

w
Stop

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Stopping distance if moving with vHu in upward direction (lift with holding

-li
Stop vHu

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

bolts

w
w

p
w

n
w

Stop vHd Stopping distance if moving with vHd in downward direction (lift with holding
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
bolts
.u

t.c

w
w
w Position for easy going on top of car, where the lift stops if the button
Insp.start

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
“Special func”-“Insp.start” is pressed (see also chapter “Input functions”)
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Floor positions
.c

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Floor distances Distance between 2 floors

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
Fl. 1- 2
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
Fl. 2- 3

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
w

n
…
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Floor height Absolute floor position

t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
n
1.Floor B ottom floor = 0
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

2.Floor
t.c

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
…

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
SGM Positionen Measured switching points of the door zone switch SGM
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
↑
f
n

.u
1.Floor switching point above 1st floor

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
↓
w

switching point below 1st floor

p

1.Floor
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

↑
t.c
-li
w

w
2.Floor
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif

…
n

.u
2.Floor

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
… …
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
24/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
SGO/SGU Position Measured switching points of the door zone switches SGO/SGU

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w ↑
.c

w
switching point SGO above 1st floor

p
1.Floor

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
↓

-li
w
switching point SGU below 1st floor

.u
1.Floor

.c
-li

ft
w

p
↑

ft
…

n
2.Floor
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

↓
.c

w
2.Floor

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
…

w
…

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w
Shaft doors Landing door positions in each floor

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
1.Floor Shaft doors in 1st floor
.u

t.c

p
w
w
2.Floor Shaft doors in 2nd floor

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

… …

w
w

p
w

n
w

Enabling / disabling of individual shaft doors and/or complete levels

p

Door releases

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
depending on the actual operation mode
.u

t.c

w
w
w Released doors for car calls during normal operation
Normal run, CC

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
Released doors in 1st floor

t.c
1.Floor
-li
w

w
.c

p
w

n
w

2.Floor "
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

"

w
…

w
w

p
w

f
n
Normal run, LC Released doors for landing calls during normal operation

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

Released doors in 1st floor

w
1.Floor

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u
2.Floor "

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
w … "

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Auto call funct. Released doors in operation mode „Automatic calls"

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
w

1.Floor Released doors in 1st floor

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

2.Floor "
t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
n
… "
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Clock run 1, CC Released doors in operation mode „Clock run 1“

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
1.Floor Released doors in 1st floor

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
2.Floor "
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
… "

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
Clock run 1, LC Released doors in operation mode „Clock run 1“
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
25/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
1.Floor Released doors in 1st floor

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
2.Floor "

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
"

.c
…

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w
Clock run 2, CC Released doors in operation mode „Clock run 2“

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
1.Floor Released doors in 1st floor

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w "
2.Floor

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
… "
-li
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Clock run 2, LC Released doors in operation mode „Clock run 2“

p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

Released doors in 1st floor

w
1.Floor

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
2.Floor "

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
… "

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Clock run 3, CC See above, up to clock run 5

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
w
…

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
Special run Released doors in operation mode „Special run“

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w

n
w

1.Floor Released doors in 1st floor

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

2.Floor "
t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n
… "

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Released doors in operation mode „VIP run“

t.c

VIP run

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u
1.Floor Released doors in 1st floor

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
2.Floor "
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
… "

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
Released doors in operation mode „Emergency run“
w

Emergency run
p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

1.Floor Released doors in 1st floor

t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
n
2.Floor "
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

… "
t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

Released doors in case of fire detection

.u
Fire evac. run

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
1.Floor Released doors in 1st floor
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
2.Floor "

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
… "
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
26/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Firemen run Released doors for fireman trip

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
1.Floor Released doors in 1st floor

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
"

.c
2.Floor

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w
… "

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
Hazard transport Released doors for hazard transportation mode

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w Released doors in 1st floor
1.Floor

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
2.Floor "
-li
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

… "
p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

If parking with open doors is enabled (see Door parameters), then here it

w
Door park mode

p
w
w

p
can be set individually for each floor, which doors should remain open when
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
the lift is on the equivalent floor.

t.c
-li
w

w
w
Opened doors if lift is on 1st floor

p
1.Floor

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
2.Floor Opened doors if lift is on 2nd floor
.u

t.c

w
w
w

p
… …
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Door parameter Parameters for up to 3 car doors

w
.c

p
w

n
w

Gener.door para.

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Cl.push Operation of the door-close button

w
w

p
w

f
No delay: the door-close button is immediately active at the beginning of the

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
door opening, ie, the opening of the door can be interrupted by pressing the
-li
w
t.c

p
door-close button and the door closes immediately

n
w

f
n

.u
delayed.: button is not active until the door was fully open

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Op.push D1 Operation of the door-open button for car door 1

w
w

p
w

f
n
all: open all the doors of the relevant floor.
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

last: The last opened doors will open again

.u

t.c

p
w
enabled: All released doors according to the operation mode will be opened

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
(see parameter "Door releases" above)

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Op.push D2 Operation of the door-open button for car door 2 (see above)

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

Op.push D3 Operation of the door-open button for car door 3 (see above)
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Dr.closeD1 Operation of the door closing in normal mode:

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
auto: The door closes automatically to start a trip

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

pulse: The door is not closed until the close-door-button was pressed

w
w

p
w

shortly.

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
stop: The door is closed only when the door-close-button is pressed and

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

held down. Releasing the button stops the door.

ft
w
w

ft

reverse: Door is closed only when the door-close-button is pressed and

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
27/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
held. When releasing the button, the door opens again as long as she was

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
not completely closed
.c

p
w

ft

n
w Door close mode for door 2; see above
Dr.closeD2

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
Dr.closeD3 Door close mode for door 3; see above
-li

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Forced Cl. Ignore light screen when lift is outside the door zone (yes / no)
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Time to switch on a signal “Release door” (“Spec.out”-“Release door”), in

w
Re.sign.[s]

p
w

ft
w

p
case the door is blocked
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u
Closeatt.SC4 Number of door close attemps, if shaft door contact (SC4) is not closing,

.c
-li
w

ft
w
before the lift controller sets a error message and clears all calls,

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
Door 1 parameter Parameter for 1st car door

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Door type Standard: Door is controlled by digital signals
w

p
w

f
n

.u
CANopen: Door drive with CANopen lift interface

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

3-wire: interface with 3 wires ST1 / ST2 / ST3 (e.g. AT-120)

w
w

p
w

n
w

Open park. allow: Lift is parked with open doors

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
forbid: Lift is parked with closed doors
.u

t.c

w
w
w yes: shaft doors on the door side 1 are revolving doors
Revolv.door

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
Lightscr.[s] time indication how long the door remains open after the reopening by light

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
screen interruption

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Rev.open [s] time indication how long the door remains open after the reopening by force

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
limitation (reversing switch)

w
w

p
w

f
n
Nudging[*2s] If the light screen is interrupted continuously, then the door is closed after

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
this time anyway (forced door closing). Here, the closing occurs with
-li
w
t.c

p
w
reduced force or speed; in addition, it will sound (if available), an acoustic

n
w

f
n

.u
signal.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Note: The nudging time is entered in 2s increments. If for example the

w
w

p
w

f
n
numerical value 20 is entered, the forced closing starts after 40s.
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Entering the value 0 disables this feature.

.u

t.c

p
w
Opentime [s] Door opening time

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
This parameter has, depending on the type of door, 2 different meanings:

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

- For doors with door-open-limit-switch the lift controller monitors if the door

w
w

p
w

f
n
is fully opened at the latest after this time. The time must be chosen in this
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

case so long, that the door has opened securely within that time.
.u

t.c

p
w
- For doors without door-open-limit-switch the lift controller assumes that the
w

p
w

f
n

.u
door is fully opened after that time. Here, then, the time should be entered

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

which actually the door requires to open.

w
w

p
w

n
w

Closetime[s] Door closing time

p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

The lift controller monitors whether the doors are closed at the latest after
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
this time.
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
28/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Open attempts Number of door open attemps

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
If the door can't properly open in a floor, the lift can be operated with a new
.c

p
w

ft

n
w call to another floor. This process can only be repeated according to the

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
number set here. If the door cannot be opened after that number of

.u

.c
-li

ft
attemps, the lift goes out of service.

p
w

ft

n
p

If the value 0 is set, there is an unlimited number of opening attempts.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Closeattempts Number of door close attemps

.c

p
w

ft
w Here it is set how often the lift controller tries to close the door before the lift

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
goes out of service.

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
If the value 0 is set, there is an unlimited number of closing attempts.

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
Rev.del.[ms] Waiting time between changing the direction of the movement of the door
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Waiting time between a door closing command of the liift controller and the

p
Cls.delay[s]

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
actual closing of the door.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Within this waiting time, for example, a warning (acoustic / optical signal)

w
w

p
w
can take place

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Switching status of the door close relay after the door is completely closed

t.c
Relays

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
or of the door open relay after the door is fully opened.

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
- both on: The door close relay remains on after the door is completely

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

closed; the door open relay remains energized after the door is fully opened

w
.c

p
w
- both off: Once the door is fully opened or closed, the door close relay and

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
door open relay are switched off

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
- Open on: The door open relay remains energized after the door is fully

w
w

p
w

f
n
opened; but the door close relay is switched off after the door is completely

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

closed.
t.c

p
w
- Close on: The door close relay remains energized after the door is fully

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
closed; but the door open relay is switched off after the door is completely

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

opened.

w
w

p
w

f
n
MaxCl.Rel[s] Only relevant if the "relay" parameter (see above) is set to "both on", or
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

"Close on":
.u

t.c

p
w

n
Here a maximum time can be set for the door close relay to remain
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
switched on. At standstill, the relay switches off after this time (e.g. to
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
prevent overheating the door motor)
w

p
w

f
n
If this value is set to 0, then the door close relay is always turned on when
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

the door is closed.

.u

t.c

p
w
w

MaxOp.Rel[s] Only relevant if the "relay" parameter (see above) is set to "both on", or
p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

"Open on":
.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Here a maximum time can be set for the door open relay to remain switched
w

p
w

n
w

on. At standstill, the relay switches off after this time (e.g. to prevent

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

overheating the door motor)

.c

w
p-

ft
w

If this value is set to 0, then the door open relay is always turned on when
w

ft

li
w
the door is opened.
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
29/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
CloseRel[ms] Only relevant if the "relay" parameter (see above) is set to "both off", or

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
"Open on" and the door has a door close limit switch:
.c

p
w

ft

n
w After the door has been closed completely (door limit switch actuated), the

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
door close relay is delayed switched off by this time.

.u

.c
-li

ft
Max.LS [s] If the light screen is constantly interrupted, then an error message will be

p
w

ft

n
p

set after this time.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Entering the value of 0 this feature is disabled.

.c

p
w

ft
w
Max.Reverse Max. number of door closing with reverse signal (mechanical obstacle)

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
If this value is set to ‘0’ the number is unlimited.

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w
Pres.sen. Door behavior if presence sensor is activated (see „Input function“):

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
Hold: Extended door open stay time
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Open: Closing doors will be re-opened (additional to extended door open

t.c

p
w
w

p
stay time)
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Ramp off never: The door ramp magnet remains constantly energized while the door

t.c
-li
w

w
w
is closed.

p
w

n
w

w
f
always: The door ramp magnet is always switch off at standstill after a time
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

delay (see parameter"Max. ramp" below).

w
w
w

p
betw.fl.: If the lift stands between 2 floors (outside the door zone), then the
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
door ramp magnet is turned off after a time delay (see parameter"Max.

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
ramp" below)

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

with door: The door ramp magnet is switched off when the door-opening

.u
Ramp

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
gets started

w
w

p
w

f
after door: The door ramp magnet is switched off when the car door is fully

-li
w
f
n

.u
opened..

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
Rampdel.[ms] Delay time between closing the revolving door and switching off of door

n
w

f
n

.u
ramp magnet (debouncing)

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Ramp off[ms] Delay time between turning off the door ramp magnet and opening the car

w
w

p
w

f
door. This ensures that the car door is unlocked safely before opening.

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Add.R.on[ms] The additional door ramp magnet is activated while the door is opening or
.u

t.c

p
w
closeing (mechanical unlocking of the door). With this parameter, a waiting

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
time can be adjusted between the activation of the additional door ramp

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

magnet and the beginning of the door opening or door closing.

w
w

p
w

f
n
Add.Roff[ms] With this parameter a waiting period can be adjusted between end of door
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

opening or door closing and the switching off the additional door ramp
.u

t.c

p
w
magnet.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Max. time the door ramp magnet is switched on while the lift is standstill

-li
w
Max.Ramp [s]
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
(only if parameter „Ramp off“ = Always" or. "Between floors" - see above)
w

p
w

n
w

Door 2 parameter Parameter for 2nd car door

p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
… See car door 1 parameter above
p-

ft
w
w

ft

Door 3 parameter Parameter for 3rd car door

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
30/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
… See car door 1 parameter above

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Floor name Names of the floors (for floor level indicator).

p
w

ft

n
w

p
This setting is only relevant if the indicator is controlled directly via the CAN
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u
bus.

.c
-li

ft
w

p
1st floor designation (eg, 'GF' or '0')

w
1.Floor

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
2.Floor 2nd floor designation
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w

p
w

…
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

ESE disp.alloc. Assignment of a floor level indicator to one of the lifts inside a lift group.

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
ESE 1.1 Lift Specifies, from which Lift the actual floor position is displayed at the floor
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

level indicator with node ID 1, branch number 1 (ESE1.1)

t.c

p
w
w

p
… …
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

ESE64.8 Lift Specifies, from which Lift the actual floor position is displayed at the floor

w
w

p
w
level indicator with node ID 64, branch number 8 (ESE64.8)

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
Setting, which TSE or ESE modules are necessary for the operation of the

-li
w
Mandatory PCBs
.u

t.c

w
lift

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Mandatory TSE

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
TSE 1 If set to "Yes" the lift goes to error state ("PCB fault") if the TSE1 does not

p
w

n
w

w
work or does not exist, but Inspection and Recall operation are still possible.

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

If set to “Safe” even Inspection and Recall operation are not possible
t.c

w
w
w
anymore.

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

If set to "No," the lift continues operation even without TSE1 and only a

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
warning ("Maintenance") flashes in the display.

p
w

n
w

f
TSE 2
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
…
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

Mandatory -ESE See TSE above

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
ESE 1.1

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

ESE 1.2
.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

ESE 64.8
.u

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

Function of the inputs and outputs of the mainboard HSE

f
HSE in-/outputs
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

HSE Inputs

w
w

p
w

n
w

w
Function of input 1 of HSE
lif

1:
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

… …

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
31/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
15: Function of input 15 of HSE

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
HSE Outputs

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
Function of output 1 of HSE

.c
1:

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w
… …

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
8: Function of output 8 of HSE

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w Function of the inputs and outputs of the car unit FVE
FVE in-/outputs

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
FVE Inputs
-li
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

1: Function of input 1 of FVE

p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
…

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
28: Function of input 28 of FVE

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
FVE Outputs

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
1: Function of output 1 of FVE

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
w …
…

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
16: Function of output 16 of FVE

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w

n
w

ASE in-/outputs Function of the inputs and outputs of the drive control unit ASE
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

ASE Inputs
t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n
1: Function of input 1 of ASE

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

…
t.c

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u
8: Function of input 8 of ASE

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
ASE Ouputs
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
1: Function of output 1 of ASE

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
…
w

…
p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

8: Function of output 8 of ASE

t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
n
TSE in-/outputs Function of the inputs and outputs of the car panel unit TSE
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

TSE 1
t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
TSE 1 Inputs

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
1: Function of input 1 of TSE1
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
… …

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
8: Function of input 8 of TSE1
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
32/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
TSE 1 Outputs

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
1: Function of ouput 1 of TSE1

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
…

.c
…

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w
8: Function of ouput 8 of TSE1

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
TSE 2

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w
TSE 2 Inputs

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
1: Function of input 1 of TSE2
-li
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

… …
p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

Function of input 8 of TSE2

w
8:

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
TSE 2 Outputs

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
1: Function of ouput 1 of TSE2

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
… …

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
w Function of ouput 8 of TSE2
8:

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
…

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w

n
w

Add PCB With this menu item another car panel unit TSE can be added (max. 16).
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Finally the new TSE is only added if at least 1 input or output function is
.u

t.c

w
w
defined for this TSE.
w

p
w

f
n
Set node ID of new TSE board

-li
w
Node ID
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Add TSE Add TSE board with the defined node ID (see above)

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
With this menu item an unused car panel unit TSE will be deleted (it will

-li
w
Remove PCB
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
delete all input-output functions of the TSE)
w

p
w

f
n
Node ID Node ID of the TSE which will be deleted
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Remove TSE TSE to be deleted with the above entered number

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Copy PCB Copy all parameters of one TSE to another

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
w Number of TSE, of which the parameters are to be copied
Source ID

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Number of TSE, to which the parameters are to be copied

t.c
Target ID
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
w

Copy parameter Copy parameters from source to destination TSE

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

Function of the inputs and outputs of the landing panel unit ESE
t.c

ESE in-/outputs
-li
w

w
w

p
w

n
w

ESE 1.1
p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
ESE 1.1 Inputs
p-

ft
w
w

ft

1: Function of input 1 of ESE1, branch 1

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
33/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
… …

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
8: Function of input 8 of ESE1, branch 1

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
ESE 1.1 Outputs

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w
1: Function of output 1 of ESE1, branch 1

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
… …

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w Function of output 8 of ESE1, branch 1
8:

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
…
-li
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

ESE 64.8
p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
ESE64.8 Inputs

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
1: Function of input 1 of ESE64, branch 8

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
… …

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
8: Function of input 8 of ESE64, branch 8

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
w
ESE64.8 Outputs

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
1: Function of output 1 of ESE64, branch 8

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w

n
w

… …
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

8: Function of output 8 of ESE64, branch 8

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n
Add PCB With this menu item another landing panel unit ESE can be added (max.

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

512).
t.c

p
w
Finally the new ESE is only added if at least 1 input or output function is

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
defined for this TSE.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Node ID Set node ID of new ESE board
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

Set branch number of new ESE board

n

Branch No.

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Add ESE Add ESE board with the defined node ID and branch number (see above)

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

Remove PCB With this menu item an unused landing panel unit ESE will be deleted (it will
.u

t.c
-li

w
w delete all input-output functions of the ESE)

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

Node ID Node ID of the ESE which will be deleted

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Branch No. Branch numnber of the ESE which will be deleted

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

Remove ESE Remove ESE with the above entered node ID and branch number
.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
Copy PCB Copy all parameters of one ESE to another
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

Source ID Node ID of ESE, of which the parameters are to be copied

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w

Node ID of ESE, to which the parameters are to be copied

w

Target ID
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
34/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Source Branch Branch number of ESE, of which the parameters are to be copied

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Target Branch Branch number of ESE, to which the parameters are to be copied

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
Start copying parameter

.c
Copy parameter

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w
Special param. Parameters for special control functions

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
Special run adj. Parameters for special trips

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w yes: The actual trip is first finished before the special drive mode is started.
Finish trip

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
no: The lift stops at the next possible floor and goes as fast as possible in

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
special drive mode.

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
CC Prior.[s] After the lift has approached a floor by a special landing call, the lift waits
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

the time which is set . Then he goes, if no special trips in the car operating
t.c

p
w
w
panel were activated back to normal operation.

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
CC if active yes: Special car calls can only be entered if the special drive mode is

t.c
-li
w

w
w
activated via a switch inside the car.

p
w

n
w

w
f
no: Special car calls can be entered within the time "CC enable" (see
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

below); there is no additional activation switch required

t.c

w
w
w

p
After the lift has approached a floor by a special landing call or a special trip
w

CC enable[s]

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
input has been activated inside the car, special trips can be started within

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
this time by pressing any car calls. After this time, all calls are locked again

p
w

n
w

w
f
until the special trip input is activated again inside the car.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

f this value is set to 0, then special trips can be started via the car calls

w
w
w

p
without time limitation.
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
->normal [s] After the lift has finished the special trip, the lift returns back to normal

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
operation after this time, except a new special car call has been entered

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u
inside this time.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Land.CC canc. yes: All car calls are deleted after the lift has approached a floor by a

w
w

p
w

f
special landing call.

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
no: The lift will keep all already entered car calls and will handle them once

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
the lift returned back to normal operation.

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
LC disable yes: All landing calls are deleted and blocked when the lift is in special run

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

mode.

w
w

p
w

f
n
no: Existing landing calls are already stored and new landing calls are taken
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
, but only approached once the lift has returned to normal operation.
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
CarC.canc. on: All car calls are deleted when the special trip switch inside the car is
w

p
w

f
n

.u
turned on.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

off: All car calls are deleted when the special trip switch inside the car is

w
w

p
w

n
w

turned off.
p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

on+off: All car calls are deleted when the special trip switch inside the car is
.u

.c

w
p-

w
turned on or turned off.

ft
w
w

ft

no: Car calls will not be deleted when the special trip switch inside the car is

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
35/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
turned on or turned off.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w Max. CC no. Max. Number of special car calls that can be entered in the special trip
.c

p
w

ft

n
w mode at the same time.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
If this value is set to 0, then the number of special car calls is not limited.

.u

.c
-li

ft
yes: If the lift is in special trip mode, but special car calls currently disabled

w
All.norm.CC

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
(see above), then new pressed car calls will be stored as standard car call
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

and will be handled once the lift went back to normal operation.
.c

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w
no: If the lift is in special trip mode, but special car calls currently disabled

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
(see above), then all car calls completely disabled.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Call no door yes: Lift will go to a floor by a special car call, even if non of the called doors
t.c

p
w
w

p
in this floor are enabled.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
no: Lift will ignore special car calls, if non of the called doors in this floor are

t.c
-li
w

w
w
enabled.

p
w

n
w

w
f
Enabled: If starting park state (no new call is pressed; see Timer parameter
n

Park doors

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

above) all enabled door will stay open

w
w
w

p
Called: If starting park state (no new call is pressed; see Timer parameter
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
above) all doors opened by last call will stay open.

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
If setting to "yes" never 2 or more car doors will stay open at the very same

p
Doors locked

n
w

w
f
n

time in special trip mode.

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Dr.closeD1 Operation of the door closing in special trip mode:

w
w

p
w

f
auto: The door closes automatically to start a trip

-li
w
f
n

.u
pulse: The door is not closed until the close-door-button was pressed

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
shortly.

n
w

f
n

.u
stop: The door is closed only when the door-close-button is pressed and

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

held down. Releasing the button stops the door.

w
w

p
w

f
reverse: Door is closed only when the door-close-button is pressed and

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
held. When releasing the button, the door opens again as long as she was

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
not completely closed

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Dr.closeD2 Door close mode for door 2; see above

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Door close mode for door 3; see above
w Dr.closeD3

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
VIP run adj. Parameters for VIP run

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
See parameter for special run above
w

…
p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

Emerg. run adj. Parameters for Emergency run

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
w

n
w

… See parameter for special run above

p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

yes: light screen is ignored when the door is closed; Door closes with
.c

Forc.door cl.

w
p-

ft
w

reduced force or speed; additionally, an accustic audible signal sounds (if

w

ft

li
w
.u

present).
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
36/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
no: „normal“ door closing

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w By fire Specifies whether emergency trips can be started in case of fire (yes / no).
.c

p
w

ft

n
w If set to "yes" emergency trips have higher priority than fire alarm control

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
(see below)

.u

.c
-li

ft
Indicates whether the floors can be reached in which a fire alarm is active

w
Run to fire

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
(yes / no)
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Parking trip Parameters for park ride

.c

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

.u
Park mode Fixed: The lift goes to a fixed Park Floor

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Zones: The lift is parked in the pre-defined zones (mainly for lift groups)

ft
w

p
w

ft
Park floor if park mode is "Fixed"

n
Park floor
w

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
(Note: Up to version 1.32y this parameters is displayed in the menu

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
"General parameter")

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Parktime[s] If the lift is not used for this time the lift will go to the specified parking level.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

(Note: Up to version 1.32y this parameters is displayed in the menu "Timer

w
w

p
w

n
parameter")
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Zone 1 Start Bottom floor of the parking zone 1
.u

t.c

w
w
w

p
Zone 1 Stop Top floor of the parking zone 1
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
Note: If the top floor value is less than the bottom floor value, then the

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
parking zone is disabled

p
w

n
w

w
f
See above
n

Zone 2 Start

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
Zone 2 Stop See above
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

....

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
w
Zone 8 Start See above

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

Zone 8 Stop See abov

.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

Specifies how many parking zones (starting with zone 1) must be filled.

f
Mand.zones

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Example: In a group lift 1 is parked within zone 1 and lift 2 is parked in zone

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
2. If lift 1 is called to another floor and the value of "Mandatory zones" is> 0,

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
then lift 2 goes to zone 1 and parks there. If the value "Mandatory Zone = 0

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

he would remain in Zone 2.

w
w

p
w

f
Visitor calls Parameters for visitors calls and visitor control

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

CC enabl.[s] Time period car calls are enabled after the lift was sent to a floor by a visitor
t.c

p
w
w

call (type 1 and type 2)

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

LC enabl.[s] Time period landing calls are enabled after a visitor call (type 1 and type 3)
.u

t.c
-li
w

w
was set.
w

p
w

n
w

w
Duration of signalling a visitor request (see "Visitor floors" below)
lif

Vis.requ.[s]
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

Door cl. Operation of the door closing after automatic setting of a car call (Visitor

ft
w
w

ft

call3 or target call)

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
37/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
auto: The doors close automatically to start a trip

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
pulse: The doors are not closed until the close-door-button was pressed
.c

p
w

ft

n
w shortly.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
stop: The doors close only when the door-close-button is pressed and held

.u

.c
-li

ft
down. Releasing the button stops the doors.

p
w

ft

n
p

reverse: Doors are closing only when the door-close-button is pressed and

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

held. When releasing the button, the doors open again as long as they were
.c

p
w

ft
w not completely closed

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Lift empty Yes: For visitor call type 2 and 4 (landing call is set automatic) the lift

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
controlle disables all car calls, but already stored car call are still handled. If

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
all car calls are served and the lift is empty (if sensor "Car empty" exists),

w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

the lift serves the visitor call.

t.c

p
w
w Landing calls are disabled during this time, but will not be served before the

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

visitor call is handled completely.

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
Visitor floors Floors (or doors), which can only be approached through a special visitor

p
w

n
w

w
control (so called attica or penthouse control).

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Short description of the visitor control: If in the car panel a car call button is
t.c

w
w
w
pressed to a visitor floor, a signal (visitor request) is set for an adjustable

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

time. If the home owner presses an enable button (Input function "Vis.CC

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
enable"), the pressed car call will be acknowledged by a flashing lamp. To

p
w

n
w

w
f
set the car call the visitor has to press the car call again (while the lamp is
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

flashing). Once this is done, the acknowledgement lamp lights up

t.c

w
w
w

p
continuously and the lift will go nonstop to the called floor.
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
Floor 1 Doors in floor 1 which only may be called by a visitor call (see above)

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
w
See above

n
Floor 2
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

....
t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
n
Handicapt people
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Call type Call type, which is processed as handicapt call (landing call Type 1 Type or
t.c

p
w

n
w

landing call Type 2)

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

If the relevant landing call (type 1 or type 2, according to this parameter) is

.u

t.c
-li

w
activated in a floor, the lift drives to this floor according to the landing call
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
processing. While arriving the floor where the handicapt call was activated
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

the voice output is activated. Upon activation of any car call, the destination
t.c

p
w
w

floor is announced, also speech signals for "door is opening", "door is

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

closing" and the current direction of travel ("lift going up-/downwards"). The
.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w waiting time until door closing starts is extended accordingly (see parameter

p
w

n
w

w
below). If more car calls were given when leaving the station, they are also
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

announced by the voice output. Car calls that were given after the floor
.c

w
p-

ft
w

status changes are no longer announced. The voice output and increased
w

ft

li
w
door open time remain active until all car calls that were pressed after the
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
38/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
handicapt call are handled. After that, the handicapt function is off until a

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
new handicapt call is activated.
.c

p
w

ft

n
w Extended door open time for handicapt call function (see above)
Call wait.[s]

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
Transp.of goods Function for transportation of goods: Door stays open as long as no car call
-li

ft
w

p
is pressed; landing call will be stored, but not handled

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u
Input Defines the input, which can start and stop this function:

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
„Door op.“: Activation by long pressing of door open push

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
„Clear CC“: Activating by long pressing of „Clear car call“ button „Both“:

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Activation by either door open push or Clear car call button

ft
w

p
w

ft
Activation[s] Time, how long the input must be pressed (swe above)

n
w

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Deactivat.[s] Time delay to return from this function to normal operation.

t.c

p
w
w Additional the following conditions must be happens:

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

- Lift is located in a floor with open doors

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
- No car call is active

p
w

n
w

- Load mesuring unit signals zero load (if exist)

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

- „Car empty“ sensor is activated (if exist)

t.c

w
w
w Parameter for emergency power evacuation
UPS Evacuation

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
Minimum waiting time period following activation of the "evacuation"signal,
-li
w

Min.delay[s]

w
.c

p
w
until the lift starts the evacuation trip, even if the signal "Evac. enable" is

n
w

w
f
n

.u
already set before this time expires.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Max.delay[s] At the latest after this time, after the signal "evacuation" has been activated,

w
w

p
w

f
n
the lift starts the evacuation trip, even if the signal "Evac.enable” isnot

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

activated.
t.c

p
w
If this parameter is set to 0, then the lift waits in any case for the signal

n
w

f
n

.u
"Evac.enable” before starting the evacuation trip.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Specifies the time after which the door should be closed after reaching the

w
Close dr.[s]
w

p
w

f
n
evacuation floor. If 0 is set, the door remains open
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Max. speed Max. Travel speed during evacuation (v3/v2/v1)

.u

t.c

p
w

n
w

p
w

yes: When switching off the signal "evacuation" ,the lift returns to normal

f
Auto return
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

operation
t.c
-li

w
w
no: The lift does not go back to normal operation (only by a Reset)

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Dec.UPS[mm] Slowing distance during evacuation via UPS. At this position the lift

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
controller switches from evacuation speed vEE(UPS) to arrival speed v0. If

p
w
w

p
w

f
the lift should stop directly from vEE(UPS) this parameter must be set to 0.
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

This value can not be measured during the setup trip and therefore must be
t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
set manually here.
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
Triptime[s] Monitoring of travel movement according to EN81 while evacuating

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
Up+Down: UPS evacuation will be done in up or down direction depending
w

Direct.
w

ft

li
w
on the input “half load”, but change direction if evacuation is not possible in
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
39/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
this direction by a drive error

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Downwards: UPS evacuation only in downwards direction (e.g. hydraulic
.c

p
w

ft

n
w lifts)

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
By drive: Evacuation direction is decided by drive (VVVF), depending on the

.u

.c
-li

ft
easiest way (load)

p
w

ft

n
p

By drive: Drive (e.g. VVVF) will work during evacuation

-li
w
Evac.type
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

By brake: UPS evacuation is done by automatic brake opening

.c

p
w

ft
w
Evacuat.control Parameters for evacuation operation according to EN81-76

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Door cl. Operation of the door closing in evacuation mode:

ft
w

p
w
auto: The door closes automatically to start a trip by the lift controller

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
pulse: The door is not closed until the close-door-button was pressed

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
shortly.

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
stop: The door is closed only when the door-close-button is pressed and

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

held down. Releasing the button stops the door.

w
w

p
w
reverse: Door is closed only when the door-close-button is pressed and

n
w

w
f
n

.u
held. When releasing the button, the door opens again as long as she was

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
not completely closed

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Door op. See above; handling of door opening

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
yes: Floors where a fire alarm has been triggered, can not be approached in
.c

Fire alarm

p
w

n
w

evacuation mode

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Run thr.fire yes: The lift can pass through floors, where the fire alarm was triggered.
t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n
FireEvacRun adj. Parameter for fire control

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Forc.door cl. yes: Light screen is ignored when the door is closed; Door closes with
t.c

p
w

n
w

reduced force and speed; additionally, an audible signal sounds (if present)
p

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

no: „Normal“ door closing

.u

t.c
-li

w
w Setting if door open push is still active or disabled in fire evacuation mode
Door op.push

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
opened: door remains open after reaching the relevant floor

t.c
Door state
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
reclose: Upon reaching the set floor the door opens and then closes again

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Dynamic mode yes: If the lift has already moved to a "safe" level in case of fire, but the fire

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

alarm is activated than in this floor, then the lift drives to another "safe"

w
w

p
w

f
n
level.
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
no: after moving to a "safe" level in case of fire the lift will stay in this floor,
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
even if the fire alarm triggers in this floor.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Fire det.act. no: The fire alarm of the individual floors are ignored unless the input "fire"

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

is enabled.

w
w

p
w

n
w

yes: the fire alarm of the individual floors are evaluated regardless of the
p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

state of the input "fire".

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
Auto return yes: After disabling the input "fire" (and, if parameter "Fire det .act " is set to
w
w

ft

yes, all fire detectors on each floor; see above) the lift returns back to

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
40/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
normal operation.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
no: The lift does not return to normal operation even after deactivation of all
.c

p
w

ft

n
w fire signals.A Power off or Reset is necessary.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
No++: Fire mode is stored in nonvolatile memory, so even in case of Reset

.u

.c
-li

ft
or power off the lift will not go back to normal operation. This is only

p
w

ft

n
p

possible by setting an input "Fire control" - "Fire return" or by selecting the

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

menu "Fire mode off"

.c

p
w

ft
w yes: The lift goes when needed, through the floor, where the fire alarm is
Run thr.fire

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
activated, to reach the nearest "safe" level.

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
no: The lift never goes through a floor where the fire alarm has been

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
activated.

w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Last trip yes: Even if it is not possible, according to the settings “Fire evac. floors”
t.c

p
w
w
(see below), to approach one of the safe floors, (f.ex. because all fire alarms

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

had been triggered) the lift approaches the last fire floor, according to this

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
setting.

p
w

n
w

w
f
Last floor Lift goes to this floor, if ther is no other safe floor avbailable (see above).
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Setting, if landing calls are enabled. If so, landings calls are handled one by

w
Land.calls
w

p
w

f
n

.u
one.

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Fire evac.floors Setting of safe floors in case of fire

w
.c

p
w

n
w

w
In case of fire the lift will go to this floor if possible

f
1. F.Evac.fl.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
2. F.Evac.fl. If it is not possible to go to the 1st fire evacuation floor in case of fire (see

w
w

p
w

f
n
above), the lift will go to this 2nd fire evacuation floor.

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

… …
t.c

p
w

n
w

Fire safe doors Setting, which doors can stay open in fire alarm mode

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

1.Floor Doors that can remain open during fire alarm mode in floor 1

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

Doors that can remain open during fire alarm mode in floor 2

-li
2.Floor

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
… …

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
Parameter for fireman trip

-li
w
Firemen run adj.
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
w Operation of the door closing in fireman mode:
Door cl.

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

auto: The door closes automatically to start a trip

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

pulse: The door is not closed until the close-door-button was pressed

p
w
w

shortly.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

stop: The door is closed only when the door-close-button is pressed and
t.c
-li
w

w
w
held down. Releasing the button stops the door.

p
w

n
w

w
lif

reverse: Door is closed only when the door-close-button is pressed and

n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
held. When releasing the button, the door opens again as long as she was
p-

ft
w
w

not completely closed

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
41/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Door op. See above; handling of door opening

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Calls Always: Car calls are always accepted in firemen mode

p
w

ft

n
w

p
Dr.closed: Calls are only accepted if doors are closed
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
2.Car call Yes: A new car call will be accepted; the old car call will be cancelled
-li

ft
w

p
No: A new car call will not be accepted; the old car call must be cleared

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u
before by using the “Cancel” button (“Spec.funct.”-“Clear calls” or “Clear

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
CarCall”)

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Only for CANopen doors and setting “Door op. = reverse”:

.u
Door op.[mm]

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Door opening position where the doors will not re-close if the door open

ft
w

p
w
push is released

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
Only for CANopen doors and setting “Door cl. = reverse”:

t.c
Door cl.[mm]

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Door closing position where the doors will not re-open if the door close push

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
is released

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Doors locked By setting "Yes" never 2 car doors open at the same time in fireman mode.

w
w

p
w

n
w

w
Door firefl. Operation of the door (opening and closing) in fireman floor (main floor):

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

auto:In the fireman floor the door opens and closes during firefighting
t.c

w
w
w operation alwaysautomaticallyl, regardless of the settings described above.

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

fire: In the fireman floor the door opens and closes like defined in the above
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

setting for all other floors (auto/pulse/stop/reverse).

p
w

n
w

w
yes: if the lift is already in fire service operation,but the firemen run input is

f
Retrieve car
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

switched off, the lift can be called back into the fireman floor by re-activating
t.c

w
w
w
the fire call.

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

no: The lift can not be called back into the fireman floor once fire operation

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
has been started.

p
w

n
w

f
auto: If the firemen run input is switched off and all doors are closed, the lift
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

will return automatic to the firemen floor, if the input fire call is still set.
t.c
-li

w
w

p
Retrieve[s] Only if parameter “Retrieve car = yes” (see above): Time, fire call input must
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
be switched off before it is possible to call lift back to fire floor (according to

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
EN81-72 at least 5 seconds)

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

Autofiremode yes: After reaching the fireman floor the lift will go to fireman operation

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c

automatically.
-li

w
w

p
w

no: To start fireman operation a separate key switch is necessary inside car

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
panel.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Auto-normal Indicates whether the lift (if fire brigade call is available after returning to the

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
fire floor) returns to normal operation after turning off the fireman key switch.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

If "No", power off or reset is required.

w
w

p
w

If set to "No++" the fireman operation mode is stored in nonvolatile memory,

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
so even in case of Reset or power off the lift will not go back to normal

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

operation. This is only possible by setting an input "Fire control" - "Firemen

ft
w
w

ft

off" or by selecting the menu "Firemen mode off"

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
42/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w Earthquake mode
.c

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

Waiting time after deactivation of seismic wave sensor until going back to

n
Wait time[s]

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
normal operation.
-li

ft
w

p
w
Max. speed Max. speed for trip ton ext floor if earthquake or seismic wave sensor is

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u
activated.

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

p
Hazardous goods

ft
w

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Car calls yes: Targeted selection is done via car calls

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
No: Separate hazardous calls are necessary.

p
w

ft

n
w

normal: cabin fan works even when transporting dangerous goods as in the

-li
w
Car fan
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

default mode.
t.c

p
w
w always: During a hazardous transport, the cabin fan is running constantly

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

Never: During a hazardous transport, the cabin fan is always off.

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
Fireman mode yes: Fireman service has higher priority than hazardous transportation

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Hazard car Switch: The Dangerous mode is switched on and off by a switch inside the
t.c

w
w
w

p
car
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
Push: Pressing the button inside the car the hazard mode is activated; by

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
pressing the push again it is deactivated.

p
w

n
w

w
f
autom.: After reaching the target floor by a hazard call, the hazard mode
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

starts automatically . If the hazard call for the current floor with the door
t.c

w
w
w

p
open is pressed again, the hazard mode is terminated (Note: Function can
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
be used only if it is accompanied with a separate button for open door /

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
close door (see below)

p
w

n
w

f
Indicates whether the car door opens automatically after entering the
n

Dr.op.call

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c

destination floor by a hazardous call.

-li

w
w

p
w

yes: Lift has separate push for opening / closing the door

f
Dr.input

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
no: Opening / Closing is started by hazardous call button

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Clear calls yes: If a hazardous call was set all calls are cleared and disabled

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
immediately.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

no: All saved car calls are handled, but new calls are not accepted. If all old

w
w

p
w

f
car calls are handled, the lift will go to the hazardous call floor.

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Landing calls are always deleted immediately.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Specifies the time after which the lift goes back to normal operation if the lift

w
->normal[s]
w

p
w

f
n

.u
was called by a hazardous call to a floor, but the hazardous mode was not

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

started via the switch or button inside the car (see above).

w
w

p
w

n
w

Start blocking Parameter for function „Start blocking“: This function is used if never more
p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

than 1 lift should move at the same time (e.g. emergency power supply).
.u

.c

w
p-

w
Blocking is done by digital inputs/outputs.

ft
w
w

ft

Mode always: start blocking active in both directions

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
43/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
upwards: start blocking active only in upwards direction (for hydraulic lifts)

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Pump start: start blocking only active while pump motor of hydraulic lifts is
.c

p
w

ft

n
w starting

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Start: start blocking in both directions while lift is starting

.u

.c
-li

ft
Number Continuous number for lifts, which are connected together for function „Start

p
w

ft

n
p

blocking“. Each lift must have a unique number.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Start [s] Only if Mode setting is “Start”:

.c

p
w

ft
w
Time delay between opening the brake (start moving) and deactivating start

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
block.

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w
Deadman control Parameter for Push control (also called "Deadman control")

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
If set to "yes"the lift is working as a "dead-man control", ie, the lift is only

t.c
Deadman cont.

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
moving as long special "dead man buttons" are pressed.

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Lock input Yes: Dead man function remains activated until reaching the target floor,

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

even if the "Dead man On" input has been turned off.

w
w

p
w

n
Yes: All calls are cleared if the input "Deadman" - "
w

Clear/En.off
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Park trip Yes: Parking trip wil be started even in deadman mode
t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Ramp drive Parameter for ramp drive according to EN81 (for example for loading and

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

unloading trucks by moving the car by open doors up to the height of

w
.c

p
w
thecargo area of the truck.

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
Ramp size Max. travel height with open doors in ramp drive mode

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
w Parameter for Remote shutdown (Remote off)
Remote off

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

The remote shutdown takes place in two stages. At the beginning thelift
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

moves to the floor attached to the "Remote off" input. Then the floor which
t.c

p
w

n
w

has been set here can also be approached

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Starting with HSE softwarer version 1.44s up to 5 different remote off

t.c
-li

w
w functions are possible

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

Final destination floor for Remote off function (only up to version 1.44r)

.u
Floor

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Doors Setting the car doors which should remain open after the lift is remote

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
switched off (only up to version 1.44r).

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Carlight off yes: In Remote shutdown the car light is switched off, even if not all car

w
w

p
w

f
n
doors are closed.
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

no: Car light will stay on in Remote shutdown mode

.u

t.c

p
w
Clear calls yes: If the remote shutdown input is activated all calls are cleared and
w

p
w

f
n

.u
disabled immediately.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
no: If the Remote off function is activated, all saved calls are still handled,
w

p
w

n
w

but new calls are not accepted. If all old calls are handled, the lift will be
p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

switched off.
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w

1.Floor Final destination floor for 1.Remote off function (starting from version 1.44s)
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
44/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
1.Doors Setting the car doors which should remain open after the lift is switched off

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
with 1.remote off function (starting from version 1.44s).
.c

p
w

ft

n
w …
...

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
5.Floor Final destination floor for 5.Remote off function (starting from version 1.44s)
-li

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
5.Doors Setting the car doors which should remain open after the lift is switched off
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
with 5.remote off function (starting from version 1.44s).
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w Specifies the doors which shall remain open in each floor when the lift has
Lift off-doors

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
been turned off by the special function "Lift off" (see section Input

.u

.c
-li
w

w
Functions)

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Floor 1 Doors which will remain open after the lift was turned off on the 1st floor

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Floor 2 Doors which will remain open after the lift was turned off on the 2nd floor

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
...

-li
...

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
Safety Beam Parameter for Safety beam

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
Safety beam available (yes/no)

-li
w
Safety beam
.u

t.c

w
w
w Clear all car calls if safety beam is interrupted while lift is moving (yes/no)
Clear CC

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
Resetting of safety beam with landing call possible call (yes / no)
-li
w

Saf.Reset LC

w
.c

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Saf.beam SL Safety beam connected in the safety line (during safety circuit interruption

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
error "light beam" is indicated).

w
w

p
w

f
n
Safety Shelter Parameter for safety shelter monitoring

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Bearer ↑ Bearer type for safety shelter in shaft top:

t.c

p
w

n
w

No: No bearer necessary / available

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

manual: hand operated bearer

t.c
-li

w
w always: The bearer is always switched on in normal operation and only

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

switched off when the top shelter space is opened (e.g. by opening shaft
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

door in top floor) or the inspection control is switched on.

t.c

p
w

n
w

moving: The bearer is switched on while the lift is moving (but not if top
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

shelter space was opened or inspection is switched on). In standstill the

t.c
-li

w
w bearer is switched off.

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

End off.: The bearer is switched on while the lift is moving (but not if top
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

shelter space was opened or inspection is switched on). In standstill the

p
w
w

bearer is switched off, but in top floor it stays on even in standstill.

w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

Bearer ↓
.u

Bearer type for safety shelter in shaft bottom:

t.c
-li
w

w
w
No: No bearer necessary / available

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

manual: hand operated bearer

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
always: The bearer is always switched on in normal operation and only
p-

ft
w
w

switched off when the bottom shelter space is opened (e.g. by opening shaft
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
45/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
door in top floor) or the inspection control in pit is switched on.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
moving: The bearer is switched on while the lift is moving (but not if top
.c

p
w

ft

n
w shelter space was opened or inspection in pit is switched on). In standstill

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
the bearer is switched off.

.u

.c
-li

ft
End off.: The bearer is switched on while the lift is moving (but not if top

p
w

ft

n
p

shelter space was opened or inspection in pit is switched on). In standstill

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

the bearer is switched off, but in bottom floor it stays on even in standstill.
.c

p
w

ft
Waitt. ↑ [s]
w Max. Waiting time for feedback contacts of the top bearer after switching an

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
automatic bearer. If the bearer contacts did not switch after this time, an

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
error message follows.

p
w

ft

n
w

Waitt. ↓ [s]
p

-li
w
See above (for bearer in bottom)
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Debounc. [ms] Debouncing time for bearer contacts
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
Insp. ↑ [mm]
f

.u
Extended slowing and stopping distance at inspection trip (with bearer in

t.c
-li
w

w
w
upwards direction)

p
w

n
w

Insp. ↓ [mm]

w
f
Extended slowing and stopping distance at inspection trip (with bearer in
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

downwards direction)
t.c

w
w
w

p
no: No folding car apron available
w

Apron

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
manual: Manually operated car apron; which means, Apron needs to be

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
folded in manually in order to return to normal operation

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

Auto: Automatically operated car apron; which means, when folding apron is

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
extended, then automatically the lift moves when returning to normal

w
w

p
w

operation somewhere below the lowest floor to automatically retract folding

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
apron (apron is then held electric)

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
mechan.: Mechanically operated car apron; which is, Folding apron pushes

p
w

n
w

f
n

together when reaching the bottom floor , and ramps up when leaving the

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

lowest floor out again

w
w

p
Slow ↑ [mm]
w

f
Position from which a lift with folding apron can switch back to fast speed

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
when leaving the lowest floor.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Note: Until the folding apron is fully folded out, the lift starts with speed v0

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
from the lowest floor.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c

Slow ↓ [mm]
-li

Position at which an lift with folding apron starts slowing down to speed v0 if

w
w

p
w

f
going to the lowest floor.

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Check ↑ [mm]

t.c
-li
w

Position below the level position of top floor, where a folding apron must be
.u

t.c

p
w
fully unfolded again
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Check ↓ [mm] See above; setting for bottom floor

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
Get apr.[mm] Position below bottom floor for getting an automatic folding apron.
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
If this setting is not equal 0, than the lift will always go down up to this

.c
w
.u

.c

w
positionto get the folding apron, even if the feedback contact from apron is
p-

ft
w
w

ft

already switched on.

n

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
46/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Governor When using the overspeed governor with additional magnetic coil for

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
protection against uncontrolled movement:
.c

p
w

ft

n
w always: The coil on the over speed governor is only switched off in case the

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
shelter monitoring has been triggered.

.u

.c
-li

ft
moving: The coil on the over speed governor is switched on while the lift is

p
w

ft

n
p

moving.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

mov.+DZ: The coil on the over speed governor is switched on while the lift
.c

p
w

ft
w is moving and while the lift stops inside the door zone

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Govern.[ms] If a feedback contact exits on the over speed governor: Maximum waiting

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
time for feedback contact while switching on and off.

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
If no feedback contact exists: delay time after switching the output

w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

"Governor" on or off.
t.c

p
w
w
If SC4 is opened while lift is outside door zone lift sets safety shelter as

p
Shelter SL4
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

opened.

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
For this function an input “Safety space” – “Reset shelt.” must exist.

p
w

n
w

w
With this parameter it can be defined if shelter top, shelter bottom or both

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

shelters are supervised.

t.c

w
w
w
With setting “No” this function is deactivated.

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
Holding bolts Parameters for lifts with holding bolts

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w
Specifies whether the lift is equipped with holding bolts (yes / no)

n
Hold.bolts
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Stop pos.[mm] Specifies how many mm lift should stop when entering a floor above this
t.c

w
w
w floor, so that the holding bolts can be pulled out or how many mm the lift

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

has to move up to bring in the holding bolts before starting a new trip.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Stop min[mm] Minimum distance above a floor to pull in / pull out the holding bolts.

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u
Stop max [mm] Maximum distance above a floor to pull in / pull out the holding bolts.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
w Area in mm where the lift could reached the holding position.
Hold.zone[mm]

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Repeat hold. Indicates, if the lift should move down again if the lift is still in holding zone

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
(see above), but the signal "Holding reached" did switch off.

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Pump.del[ms] Delay time by hydraulic lifts to start hydraulic pump again, if low pressure is

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

detected whilem the lift is in holding position.

w
w

p
w

f
n
Pump.off[mm] Position above the level position where the hydraulic re-pumping is
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
switched off again at the latest (see also parameter above). In the normal
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
case, the pump is, however, turned off when the pressure loss is
w

p
w

f
n

.u
compensated.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Relays Switching status of the holding bolts relays after the holding bolts are

w
w

p
w

n
w

completely pulled in /pulled out.

p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

- both on: The door close relay remains on after the door is completely
.u

.c

w
p-

w
closed; the door open relay remains energized after the door is fully opened

ft
w
w

ft

- both off: Once the holding bolts are completely in / out, the relays are

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
47/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
switched off immediately.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
- Out on: The relay to pull out the holding bolts remains energized even if
.c

p
w

ft

n
w the holding bolts are completely pulled out and is switched off not until the

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
holding bolts should be pulled in.

.u

.c
-li

ft
- In on: The relay to pull in the holding bolts remains energized even if the

p
w

ft

n
p

holding bolts are completely pulled in and is switched off not until the

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

holding bolts should be pulled out.

.c

p
w

ft
w - Both on: Both relays remain switched on even if the assigned state is

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
reached.

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
In-out[ms] Delay time between changing the moving direction of holding bolts (pull in /

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
pull out).

w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Max.time[s] Supervision time for pulling in / out the holding bolts. If the bolt doin't
t.c

p
w
w
reached attached position the lift controller sets an error message.

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Max.Bolt in Max. Number of attempts to pull in the holding bolt before going out of

t.c
-li
w

w
w
operation.

p
w

n
w

w
f
Max. Number of attempts to pull out the holding bolt before going out of
n

Max.Bolt out

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

operation.

w
w
w

p
w

Debouncing time for the holding bolt contacts to prevent error messages.

f
Errordel[ms]

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Startdel[ms] Start delay to move upwards / downwards for handling the holding bolts.

w
.c

p
w

n
w

w
Indicates if the holding bolts must be used in case of fireman operation.

f
Bolt if fire
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Floors with Hold Indicates which floors are equipped with holding bolts.

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

1. Floor 1st floor is equipped with holding bolts (yes / no)

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
2. Floor 2nd floor is equipped with holding bolts (yes / no)

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

...
.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
Deceler.check Parameter for Slow down supervision when driving into the end floor
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

v-lim.[mm/s]
.u

t.c

p
w
speed threshold at which the special exit "v-limit" is turned on or off.

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Slow speed Reduced speed to which delays should be applied when entering the top or
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
bottom floor (v1 or v2)
w

p
w

f
n
Slow ↑[mm] Distance from the top floor at which the reduced speed should be switched
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Slow ↓[mm]

p
See above.; for lowest floor

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

Check ↑[mm]
.u

Distance from the top floor at which the monitor input "Decel.check" (usually
t.c
-li
w

w
w switched by the special output "Shelter" - "v-limit" - see above) must have

p
w

n
w

w
lif

switched.
n

.u

.c
w
.u

Check ↓[mm]
.c

See above.; for lowest floor

w
p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
48/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Low speed zone

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Low speed zone in upward direction. Inside this zone the lift decelerates to

p
Start↑[mm]

ft

n
w

p
the reduced speed like defined with the parameter below.
ft

.u

.c
Stop ↑[mm]

-li
w
.u
If both values are set to 0 this function is deactivated.

.c
-li

ft
w

p
w

ft
Low speed zone in downward direction. Inside this zone the lift decelerates

n
Start↓[mm]
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
to the reduced speed like defined with the parameter below.

-li
w
.u

Stop ↓[mm]
.c

p
If both values are set to 0 this function is deactivated.

ft
w

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
Inside the defined low speed zone (see parameter above) the lift

w
Max.speed↑

.u

.c
-li
w

w
decelerates to this speed while upwards moving.

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Inside the defined low speed zone (see parameter above) the lift
p

-li
w
Max.speed↓
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
decelerates to this speed while downwards moving.
.u

t.c

p
w
w For checking the brake the lift controller opens the brakes step by step and
Brake check

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

checks if every single brake can hold the lift.

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
The test is carried out automatically. The brakes must be controlled

p
w

n
w

separately by different relays oft he HSE.

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Interv.[s] Time between 2 automatic brake tests. With setting 0 the test is disabled.
t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n
Time every single brake is opened for brake check

.u
Ontime [ms]

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Offtime[ms] Time between switching off 1 brake and switching on the next brake
.c

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

To start the automatic brake check the lift controller closes all doors and

.u
No carcall[s]

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
ignores landing calls (but saves landing calls in memory). If inside this time

w
w

p
w

no new car call is entered and the door is not opened (for example by door

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
open push) the lift controller will start the test.

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
Max.diff[mm] If the lift moves more than this value while brake check is carried out the lift

n
w

f
n

.u
will go out of operation (brake defect)

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Valve check For valve check the lift controller first opens the down valve and checks if

w
w

p
w

f
the A3 valve is able to hold the lift in level position. In second step the A3

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
valve is opened to check if the down valve keeps the lift in level.
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
The test is carried out automatically.

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Interv.[s] Time between 2 automatic valve tests. With setting 0 the test is disabled.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
w Time the A3 or down valve is opened for valve check
Ontime [ms]

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Offtime[ms] Time between switching off down valve and switching on A3 valve

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
w

No carcall[s] To start the automatic valve check the lift controller closes all doors and
p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
ignores landing calls (but saves landing calls in memory). If inside this time
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
no new car call is entered and the door is not opened (for example by door
w

p
w

n
w

open push) the lift controller will start the test.

p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

Max.diff[mm] If the lift moves more than this value while valve check is carried out the lift
.c

w
p-

ft
w

will go out of operation (valve defect)

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
49/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Relay A3 Setting, which HSE relays must be switched on for A3 valve test

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Rel.down Setting, which HSE relays must be switched on for down valve test

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
Parameters for clock run

.c
Clock run

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w
ClearCall on: all calls are cleared when the clock run starts

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
off: all calls are cleared when the clock run stops
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

on+off: all calls are cleared when the clock run starts and stops
.c

p
w

ft
w

p
no: calls are not cleared in the moment clock runs are activated or
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u
deactivated.

.c
-li
w

ft
w
CR1 Start[Std] start time for clock run 1 (only full hours adjustable)

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
CR1 Stop [Std] end time for clock run 1 (only full hours adjustable)
.u

t.c

p
w
w
CR1 Parkfloor Park floor while clock run 1 is active

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

CR1 Parkt.[s] If the lift is not used for this time and clock run 1 is activated the lift will go to

w
w

p
w
the specified parking level.

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Park floor while clock run 2 is active

t.c
CR2 Parkfloor

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
w If the lift is not used for this time and clock run 2 is activated the lift will go to
CR2 Parkt.[s]

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

the specified parking level.

n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
Call configurat.

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Call config. If set to "Yes" special "call tables" (see "Special parameter") are activated. If

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
the lift arrives a floor by a landing call, only car calls enabled for this landing

w
w

p
w

f
n
call ("Call table" will be handled.

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li

A maximum of 5 different call configurations can be set. Switching between

w
t.c

p
w
the Call configurations occurs only when all doors are closed and (if

n
w

f
n

.u
available), the presence sensor signals "Car empty" signals that no one is

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

inside the car anymore.

w
w

p
w

f
n
In principle, up to 5 "logical" lifts can be created for one "real" lift , in which
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

only floors or entrances within this "logic" lift can be approached.

.u

t.c

p
w
The function can be activated by this parameter as well as with an input

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
("Special function" - "Call configuration").

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

(Note: Up to version 1.41r this parameters is displayed in the menu

w
w

p
w

f
n
"General parameter")
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Change[s] Delay time (waiting time with closed doors) if changing call configuration
.u

t.c

p
w
number.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Table with enabled doors and floors in operation mode „Call config.“ (see

-li
w
Call tables
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
„General paramet.“)
w

p
w

n
w

LC config.1 Enabled doors and floors for landing calls if call configuration 1 is active
p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
1. Floor Enabled doors in floor 1
p-

ft
w
w

ft

2. Floor Enabled doors in floor 2

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
50/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
...

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
CC config.1 Enabled doors and floors for car calls if call configuration 1 is active

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
Enabled doors in floor 1

-li
w
1. Floor

.u

.c
-li

ft
w
2. Floor Enabled doors in floor 2

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
...
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w
Enabled doors and floors for landing calls if call configuration 2 is active

p
LC config.2
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

1. Floor Enabled doors in floor 1

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Enabled doors in floor 2

-li
2. Floor

w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
...

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
CC config.2 Enabled doors and floors for car calls if call configuration 2 is active
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
Enabled doors in floor 1

p
1. Floor

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
2. Floor Enabled doors in floor 2
.u

t.c

w
w
w

p
...
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

LC-config.3 Enabled doors and floors for landing calls if call configuration 3 is active

w
.c

p
w

n
w

w
...

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
...

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
En/Disable calls Parameters for enabling / disabling doors and floors

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

Disable normal: When an input is activated for disabling of calls or doors, then only
.u

t.c
-li

w
"normal" calls are affected
w

p
w

f
n
+special: Through an active input for disabling of doors or calls both
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

"normal" calls and special calls are affected

t.c

p
w

n
w

Enable normal: When an input is activated for enabling of calls or doors, then only
p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

"normal" calls are affected

.u

t.c
-li

w
+special: Through an active input for enabling of doors or calls both
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
"normal" calls and special calls are affected

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Autom.CC yes: If an input is activated to enable a car call for a floor or door, then a car
t.c

p
w
w

call for the appropriate floor and door is automatically set in this moment.
p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

Autom.LC yes: If an input is activated to enable a landing call for a floor or door, then
t.c
-li
w

w
w this landing call is automatically set in this moment.

p
w

n
w

w
lif

Clear Call yes: When setting an input for disabling a car call, an already existing car
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

call for this floor is cleared.

w
p-

ft
w
w

Priority Disable: If for one call, at the same time, an input was given to enable this
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
51/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
call and an input to disable this call, then the disable input has priority .

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Enable: If for one call, at the same time, an input was given to enable this
.c

p
w

ft

n
w call and an input to disable this call, then the enable input has priority .

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Car attendance Parameters for operating the lift with an attendant

.u

.c
-li

ft
w

p
yes: If activating a landing call, the car call acknowledge is switched on.

w
Autom. CC

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u
However, car call must be pressed manually.

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
Note: Starting with HSE Version 1.36j this setting also works in normal

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

operation.

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
Note. Starting with HSE version 1.42u the car call will blink as long as the
-li
w

ft
w

p
car call is not pressed manually

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
Door reopen Specifies whether the doors open again when the direction push is released

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
while the door is closing.

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Lightscreen Specifies whether the light screen is in function (= yes) or disabled (= no) in

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

attendance mode.

w
w

p
w
If the attendance mode (input "Attend.funct.") has been activated by a

n
Att.off[s]
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
button , the lift returns to the normal operation by pressing this button again,

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
or after the expiration of the time set here (If the time is set to 0, then there
w

p
w

f
n

.u
is no automatic return to normal operation)

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

OP lift Parameters for special lifts in hospitals (OP rooms) with a special device for

w
.c

p
w

n
w

loading / unloading non-clean things.

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
OP lift OP lift (yes/no)
.u

t.c

w
w
w

p
Car lift Parameter for car lifts
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Car lift If set to "yes" special features for car lifts are activated.
t.c

p
w

n
w

Autom.call yes: when a vehicle is entering the lift (car sensors in the car are required),

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

the lift controller automatically sets a car car call (only for 2-floor lifts).
t.c
-li

w
w
Door clos. Here it is defined whether the traffic signals at the entrance doors display

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

red or green when the lift is in the park position (all doors closed, empty

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
cabin, there is no call ).

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
Land.call count Parameter for lifts, where landing call in certain floor will be counted. The lift
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

will operate this floor than multiple times.

t.c
-li

w
w

p
Maximum time the lift is waiting after serving a lift by a „counted“ landing
w

Max.time[s]

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
call. After this time the call will be cancelled.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Floor LC count

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
1.Floor Max. number of landing calls for this floor.
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
With setting ‚0‘ the landing calls will be operated in normal way (no
w

p
w

n
w

counting).
p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

2.Floor See above

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w

ft

...
n

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
52/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Pallet lift Parameters for special lifts with pallets, which must be operated (pull

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
in/push out) by lift controller.
.c

p
w

ft

n
w Used for car parking garages for example

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Hook Time[s] Max. time to pull in/push out pallet hook. After this time the lift controller sets

.u

.c
-li

ft
an error message “Pallet hook error”.

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
Forced stop Parameters for forced stop at a floor
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
yes: Foreced stop function activated

p
Forced stop

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
no: Foreced stop function deactivated

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Floor Floor, in which the forced stop is to be performed

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Doors Doors to be opened during this enforced stop

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
w upwards: If the lift moves in upward direction, then the lift definitely stops at
Direct.

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

the floor, where a forced stop (see above) has been defined.

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
downwards: If the lift moves in downward direction, then the lift definitely

p
w

n
w

w
stops at the floor, where a forced stop (see above) has been defined.

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

up+down: Lift always stops in the defined floor independend of the travel
t.c

w
w
w direction.

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

After a forced stop the lift only continues travellings in the specified direction

.u
Locked

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
once a special input is activated (Function: Special fct., Subfunction:

p
w

n
w

w
Forc.stop off).

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Enable time[s] If, after a forced stop, a release is required for further travel (see above),
t.c

w
w
w

p
then it is set here how long the release button remains active after you
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
press.

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Waitt.up[s] If enable (input "forced stop off") is required (see above): After a forced stop

p
w

n
w

f
all calls are cleared after this waiting period, if no enable signal is given.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Waitt.dn[s]
f

.u

t.c

If no enable signal is required (see above): Here, an additional waiting time

-li

w
w

p
can be set for a forced stop. Upon pressing the enable button ("forced stop
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
off"), the waiting time is disabled.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
This parameter defines whether during clock run a forced stop is performed

p
If clock run

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
(yes / no)

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

If Special This parameter defines whether during a special trip a forced stop is

w
w

p
w

f
performed (yes / no)

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
Parameters for the auto-call function
-li
w

Auto-call func.
.u

t.c

p
w
w

Call dir. upwards: The lift stops in the upward direction on each floor one after the
p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

other and then moves from the top floor directly to the bottom floor
.u

t.c
-li
w

w
downwards: The lift stops in the downward direction on each floor one after
w

p
w

n
w

w
the other and then moves from the bottom floor directly to the top floor.
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

up+down: The lift goes first in upward direction and then in downward
.c

w
p-

ft
w

direction each floor one after another.

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
53/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Car calls Setting if car calls enabled in auto-call function

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Land.calls Setting if landing calls enabled in auto-call function

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
By hydraulic lifts with 2 or more hydraulic pistons, it can be happened that

.c
Piston balance

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

there is an excessive pressure difference between the individual pistons. To

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
eliminate the pressure difference, it is necessary to lower the lift completely
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
(below the lowest floor).This piston balance trip can be activated either time-
.u

.c

p
w

ft
controlled or via an input signal (differential pressure sensor).
w

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
Time interval in minutes to next piston balance trip

w
Interv.[min]

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w
No carcall[s] To start the piston balance trip the lift controller closes all doors and ignores

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
landing calls (but saves landing calls in memory). If inside this time no new
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
car call is entered and the door is not opened (for example by door open

p
w
w

p
w

push) the lift controller will start the trip.

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Stop ↓[mm] Position below lowest floor to stop, where piston balance trip is stopped.

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
w

n
w

As an alternative to stopping at a certain position, the piston balance trip

p

Max.time[s]

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

can also be stopped time-controlled via this parameter.

t.c

w
w
w
Oil warming

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
Time in minutes after which an oil heating trip is started
-li

Time [min]
w

w
.c

p
w

n
w

Floor Target floor for oil warming trip

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Start day Time period, in which independent oil heating trips get performed. If both,

w
w

p
w

start and stop date, are identical, then the oil heating trips are disabled.

f
n
Start month

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Stop day

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u
Stop month

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Dec.extens. ↑
w Increased slow down distance for oil warming trip in upwards direction.

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Dec.extens. ↓

t.c
-li
w

See above; for downwards direction

.u

t.c

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
Car fan
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Fan mode autom.: The cabin fan is switched on automatically at the trip start and

w
w

p
w

f
n
switched off at trip end with a time delay (see next parameter).
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

manual: The cabin fan is turned on and off with a fan switch. By this setting,
.u

t.c

p
w
a max. duration (see the next parameter) can be programmed.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
At automatic fan mode (see above): Time delay before switching off the fan

-li
w
Time [s]
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
after every trip.
w

p
w

n
w

At manual fan mode: maximum switched on time. If the time is set to 0,

p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

then the fan is not switched off automatically.

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w

Interm.door
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
54/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
While moving yes: intermediate door is monitored while moving. If this intermediate door

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
opens while moving, the lift will clear all calls and stops in the next floor. At
.c

p
w

ft

n
w the same time, an error message is set in the error stack.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
no: intermediate door is monitored only during standstill.

.u

.c
-li

ft
Car display Settings for the car level display

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u
Overload Indicates, if overload should be displayed at the landing. At a level indicator

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
inside the car overload is always displayed.

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Specifies , whether the "Non smoking sign" is displayed on the level display

.u
Non-smoke CC

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

inside car (currently only available on LCD display LCI16)

ft
w

p
w

ft
Non-smoke LC Specifies , whether the "Non smoking sign" is displayed on the level display

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
at the landings (currently only available on LCD display LCI16)

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Indicates whether the inspection state and emergency recall operation state

w
Inspection
w

p
w

f
n

.u
to be displayed on the indicator.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Out of order Specifies whether to display "Out of order" on the indicator

w
w

p
w

n
w

w
f
Fault Specifies whether to display a fault state on the indicator
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Buzzer Function of the integrated buzzer on some level indicators:

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
- Load: Buzzer sounds in case of overload

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

- Door: buzzer sounds during forced door closing (light screen ignored)

w
.c

p
w
- Car call: buzzer sounds briefly as an acoustic car call indication

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Any combination of these 3 functions are possible

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Specifies at what distance before floor level (in mm), the level display is

w
Targ.dist.
w

p
w

f
n
switched to the nexgt floor.

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

If this parameter is set to 0, level display switches to next floor at 2/3 of the
t.c

p
w

n
distance between this floors.
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Gong
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
w
Specifies at what distance before target floor level (in mm), the acoustic

p
Targ.dist.
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

signal (gong) is switched on.

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
If this parameter is set to 0, the gong sounds if the lift starts door opening.

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
Type Arrival: The gong sounds only when entering a floor
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Door open: The gong sounds while opening the door; even if the liftis
t.c
-li

w
w

p
already located in that floor while the call was placed.
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
LC no dr. Indicates whether the gong should also sound when the lift handles a

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
landing call in a floor for which doors were not set (lift only goes to the floor,

p
w
w

p
w

f
but do not open any doors)
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

LC change pecifies whether the gong should sound again if the lift handled an up or

w
w

p
w

down landing call, but no car call is placed in the selected direction and

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
accordingly the other landing call (to opposite direction) is being handled.

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

Time [s] Pulse duration of the Gong signal.

ft
w
w

ft

If the value is set to '0', then the gong signal remains active as long as the

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
55/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
lift stands in a floor.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w Speech unit Parameters for controlling a speech unit
.c

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

Pulse duration of signals for controlling a voice unit

n
Speech [ms]

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
Delay [ms] Time delay between setting of floor signals for voice output and setting the

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
"Enable" signal.
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Targ.dist. Distance before entering the target floors, in which the speech unit will
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w indicate the floor.

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Anti nuisance Parameters for avoiding call misuse

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w

p
CC undo no: a car call can not be cleared by the lift user

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
single: By pressing an acknowledged car call again this car call is cleared.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
double: By quick double pressing an acknowledged car call this car call is

p
w
w

p
w

f
cleared.

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Prior.: By quick double pressing of a car call button an advanced car call is

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
set or an already acknowledged car call is changed to an advanced car call.

n
w

w
f
n

.u
LC dir. dep. No: Even if the lift has 2 landing calls in each floor (for upwards and

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
downwards direction) the lift controller will clear both calls if the lift arrives

w
w

p
w

f
n
this floor

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
Yes: The lift controller always handles just the landing call in the actual
-li
w

w
.c

p
w
direction

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Max. CC no. This parameter may limit the maximum number of car calls that the lift

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
controller stores simultaneously. If the maximum number is reached, new

w
w

p
w

f
n
car calls are ignored.

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

The setting of this parameter should correspond approximately to the

t.c

p
w
maximum number of persons of the car.

n
w

f
n

.u
If a value of 0 is set, the number of internal calls is not limited.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

f the number of car calls is set to 1 (see above), then here can be set what

w
Canc.CC Max=1
w

p
w

f
n
will happen when a new car call is pressed:
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

yes: An existing car call is cleared and the new car call is set
.u

t.c

p
w
no: A new car call is ignored if a car call is already stored

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Max.CC empty Max. Number of car calls in an empty car. This feature requires a
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
corresponding load measuring contact.
w

p
w

f
n
If the value of 0 is set, the number of car calls is not limited in an empty car.
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

After this number of trips, where the light screen was not interrupted in a
.u

Check LS
t.c

p
w
w

floor (that means., no persons entered or got off), all other car calls are
p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

cleared.
.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Counter call Only relevant for direction pending landing calls (up / down):
w

p
w

n
w

yes: if a lift arrives a floor, at which also a landing call was pressed opposite

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

to the current direction of travel, then this landing call is also cleared if a
.c

w
p-

ft
w

new car call is operated in this direction (the person who had given these
w

ft

li
w
landing call, entered as well).
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
56/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
no: Only the landing call in the actual travel direction is cleared; the lift will

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
come back to this floor later to handle the landing call in opposite direction.
.c

p
w

ft

n
w yes: As soon as the lift reaches the bottom or top floor and changes
Clr.last fl.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
direction, all calls are cleared.

.u

.c
-li

ft
yes: All car calls opposite to the current direction of travel will be cleared or

w
Clr.opp.dir.

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
ignored.
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

CC no door Specifies whether car calls are also handled if no door for this car call is
.c

p
w

ft
w
specified (lift then moves to the floor, but do not open any doors).

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u
LC no door Specifies whether landing calls are also handled if no door for this landing

.c
-li
w

ft
w
call is specified (lift then moves to the floor, but do not open any doors).

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
Misuse detection ina two-button control: If one of the two landing calls (up /
n

Delay 2.LC[s]

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

down) is operated, the landing call in the opposite direction is disabled until

p
w
w

p
the expiry of this time period.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Safety module Depending on the safety module used, parameters, configurations, CRC

t.c
-li
w

w
w
checksum, etc. of the module are displayed here. The settings are read and

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
displayed directly from the module. They cannot be changed; this usually

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
requires special configuration software of the safety module.

w
w

p
w

f
Currently, only the LIMAX33CP (Elgo) is implemented here. For meaning of

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
each configuration parameter, see description of the device.

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
Telecommunicat. Parameters for Telecommunication

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Onboard module Parameters for the onboard module (Modem, Ethernet, ...)
.u

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

Settings

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Module Used module on HSE: Analog modem or Ethernet module

t.c

p
w

n
w

Dial delay[s] Waiting time between 2 dial attemps

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Dial attemps Number of dial attemps

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
Number of rings till connection
f

Taking calls
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Time after which the controller terminates the connection if no messages

p
Timeout[s]

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
are received.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Block size Max. length of a message

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

Modem module Parameter for onboard analog modem module

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Dialtone det. Dial tone detection active (see ATX command)

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Busy detection active yes / no (see ATX command)

-li
Busy detect.
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w Number for line dialing (if using on a PBX)
Line dialing

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u

.c
Here additional ATX commands for initializing the onboard module may be
w

Add.Init
.u

.c

w
p-

w
defined (if necessary).

ft
w
w

ft

Ethernet module

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
57/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
IP IP address of Ethernet module (or domain name; see below)

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Local Port Local port of Ethernet module

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
Definition of a Domain Name Server (IP adress).

.c
DNS

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

Necessary if a domain name is used instead of an IP adress.

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Gateway Definition of a gateway address (IP address).
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Necessary if the target address (PC) is located behind a router.
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w Definition of a subnet mask (address area inside local network)
Subnet

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u
Blocktime[ms] Waiting time until start transmission of a message over network.

.c
-li
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Blocksize Max. block size. If max. block size is reached the message will be
p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
transmittedwithout delay (see above).
.u

t.c

p
w
Add.Init Here additional ATX commands for initializing the onboard module may be
w

p
w

f
n

.u
defined (if necessary).

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
SMS Alarm in case of failure , an SMS can be sent to up to 3 different phone numbers

p
w

n
w

w
f
Parameters for 1st SMS number
n

SMS Number 1

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
Send SMS Activate 1st SMS number
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

Telephone number of SMS provider

.u
Prov.

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w
No. Telephone number of receiver

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Text Additional SMS text (next to lift number and error text)
t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
SMS Number 2 Parameters for 2nd SMS number

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

... See above

t.c

p
w

n
w

f
SMS Number 3 Parameters for 3rd SMS number
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
... See above
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

in case of failure , a telefax can be sent to up to 2 different phone numbers

n

Fax Alarm

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Fax Number 1 Parameters for 1st telefax number

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

Activate 1st telefax number

.u

Send Fax
t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
No. Telephone number of receiver

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Additional telefax text (next to lift number and error text)

.u

Text
t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
Fax Number 2 Parameters for 2nd telefax number
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

See above

w
...
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif

PC Alarm In case of failure , a message can be sent to up to 2 different PCs (on the
n

.u

.c
w
.u

PC the INTEC monitoring software IMS must be running)

.c

w
p-

ft
w

Parameters for 1st PC

w

PC Nummer 1
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
58/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Send Message Activate 1st PC message

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
No. Telephone number of 1st PC

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
Additional alarm text (next to lift number and error text)

.c
Text

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w
PC Number 2 Parameters for 2nd PC

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
See above

-li
...
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w Parameters for D-Sub connector (RS232)
D-Sub connector

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
See above (onboeard modules)
-li
w

...

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Energy savings Parameters for energy saving

p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Drive off[s] If the lift is in floor level without call for this time period, then the drive can

p
w
w

p
w

be set via the special output "Drive off" in standby mode (the drive - mainly

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
VVVF - of course, must have a corresponding standby input feature).

t.c
-li
w

w
w
In standby mode, the lift controller ignores the drive fault signal.

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

If the parameter is set to 0, then the function is disabled.

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Drivedelay[s] Waiting time after returning the drive from the standby mode. At latest after

w
w

p
w

f
the end of that time the fault signal of the drive must report the operational

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
state.

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
f the lift stands with closed doors for this time in a floor, then the doors can

w
Door off[s]

n
w

w
f
n

.u
be shut down by the special output "Door Standby".

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Door delay[s] Waiting time for returning back from standby mode until door drive is ready.

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
Time delay before switching off the level indicator inside the car when the lift
f

Car disp[s]
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

is not in use (for displays with CAN bus only)

t.c

p
w

n
w

Land.disp[s] Time delay before switching off the level indicator at the landings when the

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

lift is not in use (for displays with CAN bus only)

t.c
-li

w
w If the lift is in a floor level for this time period without any call then all traffic
Traff.off[s]

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

lights for a car lift will be switched off.

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Maintenance Settings for monitoring maintenance intervals

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Interval If maintenance interval monitoring is enabled here the number of trips until

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

next necessary maintenance is set.

w
w

p
w

f
n
Setting this parameter to 0 this function is deactivated.
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

If monitoring is enabled the maintenance counter must be re-started after

.u

t.c

p
w
each maintenance (see menu "Statistics" - "Maint.count"
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Action Reaction at the end of the maintenance interval:

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

„Calls off“: all calls disabled

w
w

p
w

n
w

„CC off“ Landing calls enabled, but car calls off

p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

„Display“: the "Out of service" indicators are turned on, otherwise the lift
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
goes on as normal.
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
59/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Warning Number of trips before the maintenance counter is reached the lift sets a

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
warning.
.c

p
w

ft

n
w For belt monitoring: Max. number of trips with direction change before the
Belt mon.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
lift stops operation. The message „Belt int.“ (Belt intervall reached) is

.u

.c
-li

ft
displayed on HSE.

p
w

ft

n
p

After changing the belt this counter can be resetted in menu „Statistics“.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Belt warn. Number of trips with changed direction before the belt monitoring limit (see
.c

p
w

ft
w
above) is reached to set a warning message „Belt int.“ In HSE display

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u
Group control Parameters for lift groups

.c
-li
w

ft
w

p
w

ft
Doorclose[s] If door closing is not possible inside this time the lift will inform the other lifts

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
in a group.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Depending on some other facts another lift may handle the landing calls of

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
this lift after that time.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Door-reopen Number of door reopenings (by light screen or door open push) after that

w
w

p
w
another lift will handle landing calls of this lift. This will prevent from blocking

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
thegroup function by this lift.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
By setting this parameter to 0 this function is deactivated.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Door-block. See above, but here is not the max. number of re-opening of the door

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

monitored, but the time duration in which the door can not be closed (e.g.

w
.c

p
w

n
w

door-open-button permanently activated or light screen constantly

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
interrupted).
.u

t.c

w
w
By setting this parameter to '0', this monitoring is disabled.
w

p
w

f
n
Up peak on [h] Start time for upwards peak traffic (It can be set only for full hours).

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Note: If start and end time have the same value, the up-peak function is
t.c

p
w

n
w

disabled.
p

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

Up peakoff [h] End-time for upwards peak traffic

.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
Start time for downwards peak traffic (It can be set only for full hours).
w

Dn peak on [h]

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Note: If start and end time have the same value, the down-peak function is

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
disabled.

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Dn peakoff [h] End-time for downwards peak traffic

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Up Park floor Park floor for upwards peak traffic
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Dn Park floor Park floor for downwards peak traffic

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Park mode Door park mode during upward or downward peak traffic
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

Doubl.LC By quick double pressing a landing call button this landing call will be
t.c
-li
w

w
w assigned just to a specific lift (or to some lifts) of the group according to this

p
w

n
w

w
lif

setting.
n

.u

.c
w
.u

Note: This parameter should be set to the same value for all lifts in a group.
.c

w
p-

ft
w

Setting which lift working together as a group.

w

Gr.Lift1
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
60/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
With this parameter it is possible to divide a group of lift into some sub-

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
groups temporarely without changing wiring.
.c

p
w

ft

n
w See above, for lift 2
Gr.Lift2

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
...
-li

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Gr.CBK1 Assignment of ESE boards on branch 1 (behind bus couple unit CBK1) to
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
some lifts inside a group.
.u

.c

p
w

ft
Together with the parameters above a larger group of lifts can be divides in
w

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
smaller sub-groups.

w
.u

.c
-li
w

ft
Gr.CBK2

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
...

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Load limits Parameters for load measurement
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Type Type of load measurement unit:

t.c
-li
w

w
w
Digit.input.: There are freely programmable controller inputs for load

p
w

n
w

w
f
measurement used (load measuring system with digital outputs required)
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Analog inp.: An analog load sensor is used, which is connected to the FVE
t.c

w
w
w

p
on the load measuring input
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
CANopen: Load measuring system with CANopen Lift interface

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
Meas. Door open: Overload is only evaluated in normal operation with the doors

p
w

n
w

w
f
open
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

Standstill: Overload is also evaluated with the door closed and with special

w
w
w

p
controls such as inspection and recall operation
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
Always: Overload is also evaluated while moving; emergency stop

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Load below this value is detected as zero load (empty cabin)

p
Zero [kg]

n
w

f
n

.u
By setting this value to 0, the no-load detection is disabled.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Half [kg] This value is recognized as half load (Car weight equal counterweight).

w
w

p
w

f
By setting this value to 0, the half-load detection is disabled

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
This value is recognized as full load (cabin occupied).
-li

Full [kg]
w
.u

t.c

p
By setting this value to 0, the full load detection is disabled.

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Overl[kg] This value is recognized as overload limit (cabin overloaded)

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Setting this value to 0, the overload detection is disabled.

w
w

p
w

f
n
Slack[kg] Load below this value is detected as slack rope.
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

By setting this value to 0, the slack rope detection is disabled.

.u

t.c

p
w
Rope diff. If several sensors (e.g. rope sensors) are used for load measurement, then
w

p
w

f
n

.u
the difference between the individual sensors must not exceed this value –

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

otherwise "rope fifference" is detected for error.

w
w

p
w

n
w

Setting this value to 0 disables rope difference monitoring.

p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

Max. [kg] This value is recognized as max.load limit (cabin max. load reached)
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
Setting this value to 0, the max.load detection is disabled.
w
w

ft

li
w
Note: Currently this parameter is not implemented in CANopen Lift CiA-417
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
61/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Em.homing Homing if max. load, rope difference or slack rope was detected (even for

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
rope lifts)
.c

p
w

ft

n
w Function for rope weight balance: While moving load measurement value is
Hold-Fct.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
holded in order to compensate the rope weight. Only possible for load

.u

.c
-li

ft
measurement device with CANopen interface.

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
Load factor Multiplier for all load measurements.
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

According to CANopen-Lift CiA-417, measurements are only possible up to

.c

p
w

ft
w
a maximum load of 50,000 kg. By this multiplier (setting 10) load

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
measurements up to 500,000 kg are possible.

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w
Temp.sensor Settings for temperature sensor on HSE board (only HSE version 1.05 and

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
newer)
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Use temperature sensor for checking minimum machine room temperature

t.c

Min.temp

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Min.Limit[°C] Minimum temperature in °C

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Use temperature sensor for checking maximum machine room temperature

w
Max.temp

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Max.Limit[°C] Maximum temperature in °C

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
Temperature level to switch on cooling (Special output-cooling; e.g. for
w Cooling [°C]

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
control cabinet fan)
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Internal Param. All red values are system parameters and should be changed only in
.c

p
w

n
w

exceptional cases by specialists.

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Empty load Analog value of the load sensor in an empty car.

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
100% load Analog value of the load sensor with a full car (rated load).

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Startpos. Internal starting value for position count

t.c

p
w

n
w

f
Counting direction of the position sensor (Encoder)
n

Count dir.

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Doorzone> >SGM Simulation of the door zone switch by controlling (distance between the
w

p
w

f
n
simulated signal SGO and SGU and switching point SGM)
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Settings for lifts with very short floor distances (<300mm approx): If the floor
.u

Min. Doorzone>
t.c

p
w

n
w

distance is less than the this value, then the two floors have a common door
p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
zone; which means, the door zone between the two floors is not switched
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
off (both "real" door zone switch as well as simulated by the lift controller or
w

p
w

f
n
"Double-AWG" door zone switch)
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Inc.by accu Setting if the incremental position encoder is buffered by battery voltage or
t.c

p
w
w

not. If set to "No", a new calibration trip (reset trip) takes place (to the
p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

reference switch SGE) if the mains supply was switched off. If set to "Yes",
.u

t.c
-li
w

w
it is assumed that the incremental encoder counts up even during a power
w

p
w

n
w

failure and thus a new calibration run is not required.

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

AWG1-2[mm] In case of usage a "Double AWG" for positioning: distance between the two
.c

w
p-

ft
w

position units and thus the difference in the measured position.

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
62/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Pos.mode[mm] Only for operation of a CANopen Lift frequency inverter in "Position mode":

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
distance from the required braking point when entering a level in which the
.c

p
w

ft

n
w targeted floors can still be changed.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
TSE I/O In normal operation TSE boards with 8 inputs/outputs will be used with this

.u

.c
-li

ft
lift controller.

p
w

ft

n
p

By setting this parameter to „16“ it is possible to use TSE boards with 16

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

inputs/outputs each.
.c

p
w

ft
w With this setting it is only possible to use TSE with odd ID number, so all

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
together maximum of 8 TSE (with standard setting 16 TSE).

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w
ESE-CBK To extend the number of possible ESE modules (CANopen allows a

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
maximum of 127 node numbers), small adaptations were made to the
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

CANopen protocol in order to expand the ESE number to 512 (8 branches

t.c

p
w
w
with 64 ESE each). Bus nodes from external providers are not always

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

compatible with this adaptation. Therefore, to use bus nodes of external

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
providers (e.g., Schäfer) as ESE, this parameter may need to be set to

p
w

n
w

w
"No". The INTEC bus nodes also work with this setting; however, it is not

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

possible to use bus couplers CBK for splitting into several branches.
t.c

w
w
w

p
Ign.VVVF-Par. Only for lifts with CANopen Lift frequency inverters: Normally the inverter
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
(drive) parameters are also stored in the lift controller and compared with

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
the inverter after switching on the drive. This parameter disables cheking

p
w

n
w

w
f
the parameter between lift controller and inverter.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

Sets whether a load measurement is to be initialized via CANopen by the lift

w
Init load

w
w

p
controller.
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
Background:. The load measuring unit "Weight watcher" by Henning

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
company has a problem in older devices, that it crashed during initialization

p
w

n
w

f
(SDO transfer) . Therefore, the initialization can hereby be switched off.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Diff. ↑
t.c
-li

hysteresis of the door zone switch SGM while switching off.

w
w

p
w

f
n
Diff. ↓
p

-li
w
f

hysteresis of the door zone switch SGM while switching on.

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Max.Slick For installations where a slip monitoring through a second, independent

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
position measuring system is required (e.g. for lifts with belt drive between

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

the motor and the drive pulley): max. allowable deviation between the two

w
w

p
w

f
n
independent position measuring systems during a trip.
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Slick/m Resolution of second independent position measurement system (pulses

.u

t.c

p
w
per m).
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
Max.Diff SGM For lifts with incremental encoder for position measurement: Max. deviation
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
on the door zone switch SGM between the currently measured position and
w

p
w

n
w

the measured during the teach-in position. If the maximum deviation is not
p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

exceeded, then the currently measured position is corrected (possible

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w

mechanical slip in measurement system). When exceeding the deviation the

w

ft

li
w
lift goes out of operation (position measuring system probably defect)
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
63/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
SL4-door op. Special setting for lifts with electrically operated landing doors: By

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
mechanical unlocking of the shaft door (SL4 interrupted) the shaft door
.c

p
w

ft

n
w opens in the corresponding floor by the lift controller.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
SL relev[ms] Waiting time for the safety circuit (safety relays KH5, KH6 and KH7 and

.u

.c
-li

ft
relay KH13) during re-levelling with open door.

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
Brake test[ms] Delay during "Brake test" (Technical check) between turning off one of the
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

brakes (the other brakes remains open) and switching off the drive (e.g.
.c

p
w

ft
w
inverter).

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
For synchronous motors, it is possible that, if drive and brake are switched

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w
off at the same time the safety gear triggers because the lift speed

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
increases very fast.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Locktest[mm] Duringshaft door lock test from inside the car,(required especially in
t.c

p
w
w

p
Austria), the lift stops above level position according to this value and opens
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
the doors so that the shaft door lock can be inspected from inside the cabin.

t.c
-li
w

w
w
Note: The lock test is activated by a special input "Door lock test".

p
w

n
w

w
f
If set to !Yes": If using emergency recall operation, inspection or setup trip
n

Recall stop

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

the lift stops in down direction if door zone switch SGM and lower prelimit

w
w
w

p
switch VU are switched on or lift is in lowest level .
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
If usinf inspection or setup trip the lift stops in up direction if upper prelimit

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
VO switch is switched on, while the lift stops in up direction by emergency

p
w

n
w

w
f
recall operation if door zone switch SGM and upper prelimit switch VO is
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

switched on or lift is in highest level.

w
w
w

p
The function also works if the setup procedure is not finished ("Setup
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
ready"=No).

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Time duration between 2 battery tests

p
Batt.[s]

n
w

f
n

.u
(default setting is 86400s = 24 hours)

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Batt.[mV] If the measured battery voltage is below this threshold, then the battery is

w
w

p
w

f
determined to be defect.

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
yes: Automatic switching of real-time clock between summer and winter
-li
w

Summer time
.u

t.c

p
w
time.

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
VI-Lim.[mm/s] Inspection speed limit at final floors (see also parameter below)

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

According to EN81-20: max. 300 mm/s

w
w

p
w

f
n
Distance before top floor, where the inspection speed must be below limit
p

VI<Lim.↑[mm]

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

(see above)
.u

t.c

p
w
See above; for bottom floor
w

VI<Lim.↓[mm]
p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c

Internal test parameter to verify validity of parameter set.

-li

Check
w

w
w

p
w

n
w

Sum Internal checksum for verifying the whole parameter set (EEPROM check)
p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
CAN-Error Value = 0: CAN-bus faults which do not lead to malfunctions (e.g. short
p-

ft
w
w

EMC pulses = "CAN passive error") are not stored in the error stack or error
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
64/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
counter of the lift controller.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Value = 1: CAN bus faults like described above are stored in the error
.c

p
w

ft

n
w counter, but not in the error stack.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Value = 2: CAN bus faults like described above are stored in the error

.u

.c
-li

ft
counter and in the error stack.

p
w

ft

n
p

yes: All ESE faults (CAN bus fault, Restart, ...) are stored separately in the

-li
w
Fault ESE
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

error stack.
.c

p
w

ft
w During switching operations of controllers with many ESE modules it can

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
therefore happen that a large number of errors in the error stack are stored

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
and the actual causes can be overwritten.

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
no: If more than 1 ESE error occurs at the same branch just one "general"

w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

error is reported in the error stack. ESEs with node ID > 32 are reported as
t.c

p
w
w "local" ESE (because this ESEs are mainly plugged in control cabinet

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

directly on HSE).

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
Can1 [kBaud] Current baud rate CAN bus 1 (control bus). Default 125 kBaud

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Can2 [kBaud] Current baud rate CAN bus 2 (shaft bus). Default 125 kBaud

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
w In a group of lifts all parameters for the landing boards ESE must be stored
Group sync.

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

identically in all control boards HSE of this group. So in case of failure /

n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
shutdown of a lift another HSE can handle the initialization of the floor
.c

p
w

n
w

nodes ESE.
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Through "group synchronization" the parameters for the floor nodes ESE
t.c

w
w
w will be transfer from the current HSE to all other HSE boards within the

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

group.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

The group synchronization has to be carried out by the HSE board that has
t.c

p
w

n
w

the actual parameters for the floor nodes ESE.

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Parameter backup
t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
n
Reload backup A parameter backup which was created earlier is loaded from the backup
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
EEPROM into the actual EEPROM.
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Reloading a backup copy is primarily intended for the case that on the

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
current parameter set (accidentally) important changes have been made

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

that can be undone through this again.

w
w

p
w

f
n
Attention! Reloading the back up copy only execute if a prior back up copy
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li

was made.
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Create backup Create a copy of the actual parameter set in the Backup EEPROM.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Making a backup copy should be done after setup is finished!

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

If parameters should be written from a PC (Lifcontrol software) to the lift

w
Receive Paramet.
w

p
w

n
w

controller by remote data transmission (Telephone line, Ethernet / Internet),

p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

then it is necessary for safety reasons that this menu item will be started.
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
Only then the HSE is ready to receive parameters.
w
w

ft

Note: This item can not be started with the hand-held terminal function of

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
65/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
the PC software "Liftcontrol". It is therefore necessary to provide a local

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
person.
.c

p
w

ft

n
w User interface for easy creating a basic set of parameters for a particular lift.
Basic setting

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
To start the default setting, the input of the password is required (protection

.u

.c
-li

ft
against misuse).

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
Errors
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
Display all entries in the error stack (last 100 errors with time stamp)

p
Error stack

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Note: By pressing ENTER the error on which the cursor is currently

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

located, will display detailed information (see section "Error stack")

ft
w

p
w

ft
Error count Display all entries of the error counter (frequency of each error)

n
w

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Clear stack Clear the entire error stack

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
Clear count Clear the entire error counter

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Hardware test of each control module.

w
Hardware test

p
w

n
w

Capital letters at the inputs / outputs indicate that the input / output is set, by
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
lowercase letters ,the input / output is not set.
.u

t.c

w
w
The letters represent a short code for the function of the input / output.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
By positioning the cursor on an output, and pressing the '0' key, the state of

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

the output for test can be changed for test purposes (switch on / off the

w
.c

p
w

n
w

output).
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Attention: Even while the lift is running this function is possible! Therefore,
.u

t.c

w
w
think about the possible consequences before carrying out!
w

p
w

f
n
For the first 8 outputs of a circuit board, the outputs can be directly set /

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

reset by pressing the corresponding number key.

t.c

p
w

n
w

By positioning the cursor on an input or output and pressing ENTER

p

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

detailed informations about the input / outpunt function are displayed and
.u

t.c
-li

w
may also be changed here.
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
Indication of the state of the inputs and outputs of the HSE; setting outputs
f

HSE In-/Outputs
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

of HSE
t.c

p
w

n
w

Example:
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
n
HW:1.01 SW:1.13
p

-li
w
f

1st line: Display of the hardware and software version

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

2nd line: state of the inputs of the HSE

t.c

w
Eee--rudSSSs-nVZ

p
w
w

3rd line: state of the door zone switch SGM

w

f
n

.u
SGM: 1

-li
w
f

.u

4th line: state of the outputs of the HSE

t.c
-li
w

w
Sdlube--
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

Here it is displayed whether the communication link (CAN bus, RS485 ...) to

w
Bus node test
p-

ft
w

the main control modules (FVE, ASE, PSE) works well or not.
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
66/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Here are all control main modules displayed, which, depending on the

-li
w
Example:
n

.u

.c
-li
w
parameter settings, must be present.
.c

p
w

ft

n
w If the communication to a module functions, then the software version

p
ft

.u
Bus nodes:

.c
-li
w
number after the module is displayed, otherwise '-' appears .

.u

.c
-li

ft
w
FVE : 01.10

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u
PSE : ---

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
The status of the inputs and outputs of the selected control module is
w
Example:

p
w

ft

.u

.c
displayed (in the example, the FVE):

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

1st line: Display of the hardware and software version

ft
w

p
w

ft
HW:01.01SW:01.01

n
w

2nd line: state of the inputs 1-16 FVE

p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
3rd line: status of the inputs 17-28 FVE
.u

---l-----ozs----
t.c

p
w
4th line: state of the outputs 1-16 FVE
w

p
w

f
yIuDft---ppl

.u
The display may vary depending on the selected module.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

cc--ljl-k---k---

w
w

p
w

n
w

w
TSE test Module test of the car panel unit TSE

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Example: Here the status of the communication is displayed of each TSE module

w
w

p
w

f
n
(starting from the left with TSE1):

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li

*: TSE module present

w

w
.c

w
TSE 1...16

p
w
-: TSE module missing

n
w

w
f
n

.u
+: TSE available; but should not be present according to parameter setting

t.c
Act.: TSE 2

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
In the 2nd line is displayed, which TSE module is currently selected by the

w
w
**-*+

p
w

f
n
cursor.

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Pressing ENTER more details will be shown for the selected TSE (see
t.c

p
w
below).

n
w

f
n

.u
The status of the inputs and outputs of the selected TSE module is

t.c
-li
Example:
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

displayed here (in the example TSE2):

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
TSE2: PMA.1

t.c
-li
w

1st line: Display of the module used as TSE2 (in the example car position
.u

t.c

p
w
indicator PMA.1)

n
w

HW:01.00SW:01.02
p
w

f
n

.u
Line 2: Display of the hardware and software version

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

I1-I8: iiiiiios
t.c
-li

3rd line: status of the inputs 1-8 of TSE

w
w

p
w

f
O1-O8: iiiiii--

n
4th line: status of the outputs 1-8 of TSE
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

ESE test Module test of the landing panel unit ESE

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
Here the status of the communication is displayed of each ESE module
n

.u
Example:

-li
w
f

.u

(starting from the left with ESE1.1; if more than 32 ESE modules are
t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
available they will be displayed in next picture by scrolling with the cursor
w

n
w

w
lif

ESE 1.1 ... 32.1

n

.u
keys):

.c
w
.u

.c

w
*: ESE module present
p-

Act.: ESE 2.1

ft
w
w

ft

-: ESE module missing

n

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
67/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
**-*+*********** +: ESE available; but should not be present according to parameter setting

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
In the 2nd line is displayed, which ESE module is currently selected by the
.c

w
***++--**

p
w

ft

n
w cursor.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Pressing ENTER more details will be shown for the selected ESE (see

.u

.c
-li

ft
below).

p
w

ft

n
p

The status of the inputs and outputs of the selected ESE module is

-li
w
Example:
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

displayed here (in the example ESE2.1):

.c

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

.u

.c
ESE2.1: UEA.1

-li
w
1st line: Display of the module used as TSE1 (in the example general input /

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
output board UEA.1)

w
HW:01.00SW:01.02

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
Line 2: Display of the hardware and software version

w
n

.u
I1-I8: aas-----

t.c
-li
w
.u

3rd line: status of the inputs 1-8 of ESE

t.c

p
w
w O1-O8: aa-kkk-- 4th line: status of the outputs 1-8 of ESE

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Group conn. test Here all present HSE modules within a group are displayed (starting from

t.c
-li
w

w
w
the left, lift 1 of the group ).

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Example: The example shows a group of 3 lifts:

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
- Lift 1: Communication to this HSE is available ('*')

w
w

p
w

f
- Lift 2: Communication to this HSE doesn't work ('-')

.u
-li
w
f
n

Group lifts

.u
- Lift 3: The sign 'S' means that the function is carried out at lift number 3

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
- The sign '#' on position 4 means that, even if the parameter "group size" is

w
1......8

n
w

w
f
n

.u
set to 3, a fourth HSE in connected to the bus (maybe the parameter is set

t.c
-li
w
*-S#
.u

t.c

w
wrong or the group number of lift 2 is set errornous to lift number 4)

w
w

p
w

f
CBK test Module test CAN bus coupler CBK

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Example: *: CBK module available

t.c

p
w

n
w

-: CBK module missing

p

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

In line 2 it is shown which CBK module is currently selected by the cursor.

.u

t.c
-li

w
CBK 1......8 Pressing ENTER the currently selected module hardware and software
w

p
w

f
n
p

version will be displayed.

-li
w
f
n

Act.: CBK2

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
*-*

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

Example: 1st line: Displays the board used as CBK

.u

t.c
-li

w
2nd line: hardware and software version of the CBK
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

CBK2: G242C
.u

t.c

p
w
w

HW:01.00SW:01.05
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

AWG test Module test of the modules required for the double-AWG AWG2 and POS2

w
w

p
w

(UEA.1 module for switching of the 2nd channel of the safety circuit for

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
moving with open doors)

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

Since AWG2 and POS2 are on a separate CAN -Bu , the module test can

ft
w
w

ft

only be performed when the CAN bus is connected to the control bus (on

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
68/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
which also the HSE is connected) or can be connected via relay (the relay

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
is switched through special output "CAN-AWG").
.c

p
w

ft

n
w
Example:

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
In the example the CAN bus connection wokrs well to POS2, the software

p
w

ft

n
POS2: 1.02
p

version of POS2 is 1.02.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

AWG2: --- The CAN bus connection to AWG2 is interrupted or AWG2 is defective.
.c

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

.u
Doors Doors module test (CANopen doors)

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Example:
w

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
The example indicates that door 1 is controlled via CAN open (see more

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
details by pressing ENTER). Door 2 is controlled by inputs and outputs

w
w

p
w

f
Door1: ok

.u
directly through the FVE (no further action by pressing ENTER).

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Door2: (FVE)

w
w

p
w

n
w

w
f
Example:
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
Door1: AT40
f
n

Display of the door type as well as the hardware and software version of

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
HW:Rev.01 door controller.

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
SW:V01.25

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
w Menu is only available if a load measurement device with CAN bus
Load measurement

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

connection is used
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Example:

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
MCAN
w 1st line: Name of the load measurement unit

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

2nd Line: Current Software Version of the load measurement unit

n

.u
HW:V1.0

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

3rd Line: Current Hardware version of the load measurement unit

p
w
SW:V1.0

n
w

4th line: Actual load value

w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

163 kg
.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
Example: (6 Sensors)

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
w

1. 63kg 5. 71kg
w

f
n

By using the cursor keys it is possible to switch between the display show

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

above and a display which shows the load values of each sing load sensor.
w

2. 68kg 6. 68kg

w
w

p
w

n
w

3. 72kg

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
4. 59kg
p-

ft
w
w

ft

Modem/Ethernet Hardware test Onboard module (Ethernet/Modem)

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
69/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
1st line: module type

-li
w
Example:
n

.u

.c
-li
w
2nd line: Last command to the module
.c

p
w

ft

n
w 3rd line left: Modem state

p
ft

.u
Ethernet

.c
-li
w
3rd line right: Monitoring time

.u

.c
-li

ft
4th line: module signals (from left):

w
WAIT

p
w

ft

n
p

Incoming call RI | CTS input | Input DCD | DSR input |

-li
w
n

.u
OK 0

.c
-li
w
.u

Reset output | RTS output | DTR output

.c

p
w

ft
1 0 1 0 1 0 1
w

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u
RS232 Hardware^test D-Sub interface (RS232)

.c
-li
w

ft
w

p
w
1st line: Parameterized connection type (RS232 / modem)

ft

n
w

Example:
p

-li
w
n

.u
2nd line: Last command to the module

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
3rd line left: Modem state

w
w

p
w

f
RS232

.u
3rd line right: Monitoring time

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

CONNECTED 4th line: module signals (from left):

w
w

p
w
Incoming call RI | CTS input | Input DCD | DSR input |

n
w

w
f
NOTHING 3
n

.u

t.c
Reset output | RTS output | DTR output

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
1 0 1 0 1 0 1

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
Save parameters Saving all controller parameters
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
If modified parameters are not saved, then during a reset / turn on / off
.c

p
w

n
w

power supply, all previous changes will be lost.

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Node ID
t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
Node ID TSE Setting the node ID of a car panel unit TSE

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Node ID Input of node ID of TSE

t.c

p
w

n
w

f
Initialization Start of Initialization
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Setting the node ID of a landing panel unit ESE

w
Node ID ESE
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

Node ID Input of node ID of ESE

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
New branch number of ESE

w
Branch No.

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

Initialization Start of Initialization

.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
Initialization of a PCB (UEA) as drive control unit ASE
w

Node ID ASE

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Node ID PSE Initialization of a PCB (UEA) as positioning unit PSE

.u

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

Initialization of a PCB (UEA) as simulation unit for test purposes

f
Node ID Simul.
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Load weighing

w
w

p
w

n
w

w
Settings for analog sensor
lif

Analog inp.
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

Adjust sensor Mechanical adjustment of the load sensor (only when connected directly to

ft
w
w

ft

the analog load sensor input of FVE)

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
70/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w
■■■

ft

n
The load sensor should be adjusted in a way that the measured value is

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
about 20 by empty car (if the sensor value increases by higher load) or
.c

w
Meas.value: 24%

p
w

ft

n
w about 80% (in case the sensor value decreases by higher load).

p
ft

.u
Ready: ENT

.c
-li
w
The bar graph is calibrated for use with analog sensor from Winston XM18-

.u

.c
-li

ft
3010PMU - here the sensor should be adjusted by empty car in a way that

p
w

ft

n
p

the bar graph is 0.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Calibration Calibration of load sensor should be done (if possible) with nominal load.
.c

p
w

ft
w The sensor value by nominal load should be not greater than 80% (if sensor

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
value increases with higher load) or 20% (if sensor value decreases with

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
higher load).

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
Note: Before starting calibration make sure the parameter "General

w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

paramet. - Nom.Ld.[kg]" is set right.

t.c

p
w
w
Nominal lift load

p
Nom.Ld.[kg]
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

This value is also displayed in "General param."

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
Load[kg] Loading of the car with a defined load. By inputting this load value, the

p
w

n
w

w
f
characteristic curve of the load sensor is calibrated.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

Start of the calibration

w
Start calibr.

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
CANopen Settings for load sensor with CANopen interface

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
Zero calibr. Zero load adjustment (car must be empty)

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Safety module

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
w
State

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
Select new state Menu item for state change Limax33CP: In the 2nd line, the desired new

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
state can be selected. The state can be activated via the 3rd line by

n
w

Normal
p

f
n

.u
pressing ENTER.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Set state <ET>

t.c
-li

Note: A state change is only possible if the appropriate requirements are

w
w

p
w

f
met. See operating instructions Limax33CP.

n
-- ESC --
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Error Current error state of Limax33CP (see operating instructions Limax33CP).

t.c

p
w

n
w

If "Reset" is displayed here as an error, then an error has previously

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

occurred, which can be reset here manually by pressing ENTER.

.u

t.c
-li

w
w Pressing ENTER again resets Limax33CP and deletes the error state
Reset Limax33CP

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Are you sure?

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Continue: ENT
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

Cancel: ESC
t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
w

No event This line currently shows events detected by the Limax33CP (e.g.

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
overspeed, UCM, final limit switch, no deceleration)

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

w
Set clock Set real time clock of HSE

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
71/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Day Set day

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Month Set month

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
Set year

.c
Year

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w
Hour Set hour

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
Minute Set minute

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w Set seconds
Second

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
Weekday Set week day
-li
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Start clock Start real time clock with the settings above.
p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

Travel movements by keypad.

w
Travel commands

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Up<1>-Dn<3> VR By pressing and holding the relevant button the lift will go upwards or

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

downwards with the selected speed.

w
w
Up<4>-Dn<6> VRS

p
w

n
In line 4 a possible error will be displayed.
w

w
f
n

.u
Exit with <ENT>

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
Safety line off
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
Door commands Door movement controlled by keypad

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w
Here the actual The doors may be controlled with the following keys::

n
w

w
f
n

.u
1: Open door 1

t.c
-li
w
.u

door state is
t.c

w
2: Close door 1

w
w

p
w

f
displayed (see

n
3: Forced closing of door 1 (light screen is ignored)

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

also description 4: Open door 2

t.c

p
w
5: Close door 2

n
w

of "State

f
n

.u

t.c
6: Forced closing of door 2 (light screen is ignored)

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

display 3" in 7: Open door 3

w
w

p
w

f
n
8: Close door 3
p

annex)

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

9: Forced closing of door 3 (light screen is ignored)

.u

t.c

p
w
0: Stop all door movements immediately

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
↑ or ↓: Toggle between display of door 1/2 and door 3

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Set car calls Set car calls by keypad
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Actual floor 3 1st line: Display of the current floor

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
2nd line: Entering the floor for the new call

p
w
Call floor 5
w

p
w

f
3rd line: After pressing ENTER , for a few seconds a message is shown,
n

.u
-li
w
f

Call entered
.u

that the call was placed.

t.c
-li
w

w
w
4th line: This display appears if calls are disabled.

p
w

Calls disabled

n
w

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

Technical check Menu for technical inspection of the lift , according to EN-81
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
See also chapter "Technical check"
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
72/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Limitswitch top Checking of the upper final limit switch

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Limitswitch bot. Checking of the lower final limit switch

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u
Trip time test

.c
Trip time

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w
Speed limit Overspeed test

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
Overspeed trip Test, if lift controller switches off on overspeed by starting the lift with 1,5

-li
w
.u

.c

p
times of nominal speed (only possible by CANopen-lift drives)

ft
w

p
w

ft

.u
Speed check Test, if lift controller switches off on overspeed by internal lowering the

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

nominal speed setting

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Safety gear Test of the safety gear (only possible if the lift controller is equipped with an
p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
output for remote tripping of overspeed governor)
.u

t.c

p
w
Mechanical brake Test of mechanical motor brake
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Brake not open Start without opening the brake

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
w
Start in upward direction

n
Start upwards
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Start downwards Start in downward direction

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n
Brake off trip Switching off the brake while driving

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Brake 1 Switch off brake 1 while moving
.c

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

Switch off brake 2 while moving

.u
Brake 2

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
... Switch off brake n while moving
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

Test of every single brake while lift is standstill (see also “Special param.* -

.u
Brake standstill

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
“Brake check”

p
w

n
w

f
A3/Down valve Test, if A3 valve and Down valve are able to keep the lift in level position
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Brake monitoring Testing the brake supervision contacts

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

On in standstill Testing the supervision contact while lift is standstill

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Selecting a contact for testing

w
Brake 1

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

Brake 2
.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

...

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Off on trip Testing the supervision contact while lift is moving

.u

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

...

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

On by stop Testing the supervision contact at trip end

w
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif

...
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

Valve monitoring Testing the valve supervision contacts

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
73/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
On in standstill Testing the supervision contact while lift is standstill

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Up valve Selecting a contact for testing

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
Down valve 1

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w
Down valve 2

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
Emerg.valve

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w Testing the supervision contact while lift is moving
Off on trip

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
... Selecting a contact for testing
-li
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

On by stop Testing the supervision contact at trip end

p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

Selecting a contact for testing

w
...

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Runn. contactor Test of mains contactors supervising.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

It can be defined, which relay of the HSE should remain on after trip end.

w
w

p
w

n
w

Open door safety Test of safety circuit for moving with open doors
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Deceler.check Test of deceleration control circuit.

t.c

w
w
w

p
Lift moves up to top / bottom floor without reducing running speed.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
Top floor

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w

n
Bottom floor
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Uncontr.movement Test UCM (uncontrolled movement)

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
n
Upward dir. Test in upward direction

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Downward dir. Test in downward direction

t.c

p
w

n
w

f
n

Manual start of a battery test.

.u
Battery check Example:

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Note: The battery test is also performed automatically at the set time

w
w

p
w

interval (default is 24 hours).

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

Voltage 12850 mV

.u
Up to software version 1.38a this menu item is located directly in the main

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
menu.

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Reset HSE Perform a software reset of the HSE.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Teach in trip Calibration of the lift during commissioning.
w

p
w

f
n
p

Depending on the type of the positioning system (incremental or absolute

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

encoder) different sub menu items appear here.

t.c

p
w
w

Note: If conventional positioning with switches only is used a teach-in trip is

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

not required.
.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Sub menus if Positioning system with incremental encoder
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
Complete Start of the entire calibration process.

.c
w
.u

.c

w
The lift must be located at the beginning of the calibration process on the
p-

ft
w
w

ft

lowest floor (SGM on). After starting teach-in trip the lift goes to the top floor

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
74/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
and then back down a floor to measure and store the switch points of the

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
leveling switch SGM. Then, the lift carries out trips with several speeds in up
.c

p
w

ft

n
w and down direction to determine the necessary braking and stopping

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
distances.

.u

.c
-li

ft
Note: In general, the complete calibration should be done only once (unless

p
w

ft

n
p

it was a new positioning system installed with a different resolution or there

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

have been changes made at the switching points of the leveling switch SGM
.c

p
w

ft
w ). If you change the settings on the drive (frequency inverters, valves, ...) it

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
is only necessary to re-calibrate the braking distances (see next menu

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
item).

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
Measurement of the switch points of levelling switch SGM (see above).

w
Shaft sensors
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Brake distances Measurement of the necessary braking and stopping distances for the

p
w
w

p
w

f
n
different speeds (see above).

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
Note: When changing the settings on the drive (frequency inverters, valves,
-li
w

w
w

p
w
...), it is generally necessary to re-calibrate the braking distances.

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Flush correction Correction of the flush on each floor

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Note: For flush correction it has to take into consideration, that it is not

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
always possible to stop exactly in floor level, especially for unregulated

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

drives (e.g. two-speed motors).

w
.c

p
w
So it is only possible to teach the lift controller the exact floor position.

n
w

w
f
n

.u
If, for example, during flush correction, the display of the handheld terminal

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
shows a difference of -5mm and the cabin is really located at -5mm, then no

w
w

p
w

f
n
additional flush correction is necessary - the lift controller already knows the

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

exact level position. An improvement of level position is in this case only

t.c

p
w
possible by an improvement of the drive (VVVF, valves, ...) and after that a

n
w

f
n

.u
new measurement of brake distances.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Flush correction via car operation panel COP

w
via COP
w

p
w

f
n
After starting the menu item the lift controller switches on the emergency
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

light. Through the car operating panel the individual floors can be selected.
.u

t.c

p
w

n
If the lift stands too high in a floor, then the position can be corrected by
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
repeately pressing the door open button ; if the lift stands too low, then the

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
correction takes place by using the car call button of the current floor.
w

p
w

f
n
Example: If the lift stands 12 mm too high, then the door open button has to
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

be operated 12 times with a time delay of at least 1 sec. As an acknowledge

.u

t.c

p
w
, the lift controller switches off the emergency light each time for 1 sec.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
Note: The correction is only effective when the lift enters this floor the next
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
time.
w

p
w

n
w

The correction can be repeated as often as desired for each floor.

p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

Flush correction via HSE keypad or handheld terminal.

.u

via terminal
.c

w
p-

ft
w

When starting the menu item, a dialog box for entering a car call appears
w

ft

li
w
(selection with cursor keys, confirm with ENTER) .
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
75/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
After reaching the floor the lift controller displays the difference between the

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
actual position and the momentary stored flush position (if the lift drive, e.g.
.c

p
w

ft

n
w VVVF, works very accurat, this difference is always about 0).

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Using the cursor keys the difference between car position and level position

.u

.c
-li

ft
can be entered now. If the car is too high, a negative value must be entered

p
w

ft

n
p

;if the car is too low a positive value must be set. The setting must be

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

confirmed by pressing ENTER.

.c

p
w

ft
w Note: The correction is only effective when the lift enters this floor the next

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
time.

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
The correction can be repeated as often as desired for each floor.

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
Menu to support automatic motor tuning, e.g. for VVVF.

w
Motor tuning
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Motor tuning itself must be activated directly on VVVF.

t.c

p
w
w
On: Normal mode

p
Brake contrl.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

Off: Brake will stay closed even if travel command is entered. Monitoring of

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
feedback signals from VVVF and brake are deactivated.

p
w

n
w

w
Only travel commands in inspection mode, recall operation mode or from

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

menu „Travel commands“ are accepted.

t.c

w
w
w

p
Sub menus if Positioning system with absolute encoder
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Floor positions Input of the floor positions. There are 3 different ways:

w
.c

p
w

n
w

If the distances between floors are known, the values can be entered here.

w
Floor distances

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Floor 1-2 Distance between floor 1 and 2

w
w

p
w

f
n
Distance between floor 2 and 3

-li
w
Floor 2-3
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
...

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Floor height If the absolute position (height) of the floors are known, the values can be
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
entered here (reference point is lowest floor = 0)
w

p
w

f
n
Position (height) of floor 2
p

Floor 2

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Floor 3 Position (height) of floor 3

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
...

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
w If the level positions are not known, then each floor can be reached here
Measurement

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

and the position is automatically measured.

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

The sequence of calibration does not matter; the measurement can be

t.c

p
w
w

repeated several times for individual floors. It only must be ensured that
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

each floor is measured at least once.

t.c
-li
w

w
w Here, the menu "Travel commands" can be called, with which the individual
Travel commands

p
w

n
w

w
lif

floors can be reached (see also description of "Travel commands" above).

n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

As an alternative to this menu item the individual floors can also be reached

w
p-

ft
w

by inspection or emergency control.

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
76/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Act.floor After a floor has been reached (deviation should not be more than 50mm;

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
The more precisely, the easier the flush correction is done later), the
.c

w
Measure floor

p
w

ft

n
w number of the current floor is entered in first line. Subsequently, with the

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
item "Measure position" , the current position is stored.

.u

.c
-li

ft
Set reference Setting of the reference point for the absolute encoder.

p
w

ft

n
p

Note: If the absolute encoder or the magnetic tape of the ELGO position

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

system must be changed (by a defect), it is only necessary to set the

.c

p
w

ft
w reference point again (as long as the resolution of the absolute encoder did

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
not change).

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w
Act.floor To input the reference point , the lift is moved as accurately as possible to

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
any floor. Then the current floor is entered from the keyboard in the 1st line,
n

.u
Set reference

t.c
-li
w
.u

the cursor is then placed in the 2nd row and by pressing ENTER, the
t.c

p
w
w
reference point is set.

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Brake distances See above "Brake distances" by incremental encoder

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
w
Flush correction See above "Flush correction" by incremental encoder

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

via COP See above

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
Via terminal See above

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

See above "Motor tuning" by incremental encoder

w
Motor tuning
.c

p
w

n
w

w
f
See above
n

...

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
Sub menus if Positioning system with Limax33CP
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

To measure the upper or lower end position, the lift must be moved to the
n

Highest position

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

car or counterweight buffer by using the emergency electrical operation (or

p
w
Lowest position

n
w

menu item "Travel commands").

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

After reaching the end position, the current position value is stored as the
t.c
-li

w
w
top or bottom end position in the Limax33CP by pressing ENTER

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Floor positions See above setting "Floor positions" by absolute encoder

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
...

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Save positions Calculate, check, and store the measured values.

t.c
-li

w
w If a problem occurs, all position values can be checked in menu “Parameter”

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

– “Safety module” – “Floor height” and “Limit positions”.

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

See above "Brake distances" by incremental encoder

w
Brake distances

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Flush correction See above "Flush correction" by incremental encoder

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
...
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
Motor tuning See above "Motor tuning" by incremental encoder

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
See above
w

...
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
77/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Teach in door

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Teach in door 1 Start automatic teach-in run for door controller (only possible by door

p
w

ft

n
w

p
controllers according to CANopen lift DSP417)
ft

.u

.c
Teach in door 2

-li
w
.u
Check also operating manual of door controller (for example for start

.c
-li

ft
w
Teach in door 3

p
position for teach-in run)

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
Statistics Various statistical values

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w Displays how often each individual floor has been approached.
Floor count

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
Maint.count Maintenance counter
-li
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Trips: Number of remaining trips until the expiry of the maintenance interval
p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

Here, the maintenance interval can be restarted.

w
Reset counter

p
w
w

p
When monitoring the maintenance interval (see parameter "Maintenance
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Interval") this menu item must be started on time before the expiry of the

t.c
-li
w

w
w
maintenance interval.

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Clear trip count Clearing the trip counter

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Note: The trip counter is shown in State display 1.

w
w

p
w

f
Clear op.hours Clearing the operating time counter

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
Note: The operating time counter is shown in State display 1.

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w
Clear floorcount Clearing the floor counter

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Test Activation of various test modes.
.u

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

Activation of test runs by the random principle.

f
Test runs

-li
w
f
n

.u
The lift can be used normally. If there is no new call after reaching a floor,

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
the control itself gives a car call randomly.

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u
Run no. Number of test runs until the test drive mode is automatically disabled. By

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

setting '0' the test drive mode must in all cases be terminated manually.

w
w

p
w

f
The lift drives "normal", but does not open the doors (exception: pressing

n
Lock doors
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
the door open button in the cabin).
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Disable LC Disable all landing calls

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

Out of order Switch on "Out of order" display, but lift stays in normal mode
.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
Load mode Start / stop load mode (door stop)

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Activate lift simulation (e.g. for testing the controller cabinet or for
.u

Simulation
t.c

p
w
w

demonstration)
p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

Emerg.rescue Menu item to deactivate several supervision functions of the lift controller in
.u

t.c
-li
w

w
case of error for emergency rescue.
w

p
w

n
w

In rescue mode the lift can be moved by Emergency recall operation or by

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

Inspection mode.
.c

w
p-

ft
w

In main state display "Rescue" is shown, if any of the supervision functions

w

ft

li
w
is deactivated.
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
78/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
A supervision is deactivated by setting its value to "Off".

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
All settings are only stored in RAM, so all supervisions are activated after
.c

p
w

ft

n
w reset or power on.

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Governor Deactivate governor supervision

.u

.c
-li

ft
w

p
Deactivate contactor supervision

w
Contactor

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Brake/valve Deactivate brake supervision (rope lift) or valve supervision (hydraulik lift)
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w

p
Deactivate supervision of bearer for safety space
w

Bearer
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Parameter set In some inverters it is possible to switch to a separate 2nd parameter set for

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
emergency rescue, in which, for example, a stronger motor torque is set to
w

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
pull the lift out of the safety gear. The parameter set can be switched with
.u

t.c

p
w
this parameter.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
After changing the setting, the current parameter set is read out again from

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

the inverter. If switching is not possible, the original value is displayed

w
w

p
w

n
w

again.
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Note: The 2nd parameter set must be configured and released on the
.u

t.c

w
w
inverter. See the inverter's instruction manual.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Battery check Manual start of a battery test.

-li
w
Example:
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Note: The battery test is also performed automatically at the set time

w
.c

p
w

n
w

interval (default is 24 hours).

p

w
f
n

.u
Voltage 12850 mV

t.c
-li
w
Beginning with software version 1.38b this menu item is located dir in the
.u

t.c

w
w
technical check menu.
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
Reset HSE Perform a software reset of the HSE.
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Change password Password protection of the lift controller

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
User password Password protection for the entire menu structure; however, through short
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
commands it is still possible to set car calls and start the menu "Technical
w

p
w

f
n
check".
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Code Change the password (code number; max 10 numbers)

t.c

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
Superv.password Password protection for changing parameters
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Code Change the password (code number; max 10 numbers)

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

Remote password Password protection for access by remote data transmission (modem,
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Internet)
t.c

p
w
w

Change the password (code number; max 10 numbers)

w

Code

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Virtual Terminal Access to the operating panel of devices according to CANopen lift DSP417

w
w

p
w

n
Some additional keypad inputs, depending of the used CANopen lift
w

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

component, are possible:

.u

.c

w
p-

w
ENTER for at least 1 second: Info button (e.g. Zetadyn)

ft
w
w

ft

ESC for at least 1 second: stops the virtual terminal (Quit)

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
79/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
1. Menu level 2. Menu level 3. Menu level 4. Menu level Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Key '1' for at least 1 second: F1 key

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Key '2' for at least 1 second: F2 key
.c

p
w

ft

n
w Key '3' for at least 1 second: F3 key

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Key '4' for at least 1 second: F4 key

.u

.c
-li

ft
Key '5' for at least 1 second: Plus key

p
w

ft

n
p

Key '6' for at least 1 second: Minus key

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Key '7' for at least 1 second: Cursor left

.c

p
w

ft
w Key '9' for at least 1 second: Cursor right

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Key '0' for at least 1 second: Shift display for 4 digits to the right or to the left

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
(as the control display of HSE has only 16 characters per line, but most

p
w

ft

n
w

CANopen lifts devices have 20 characters per line).

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Drive Virtual terminal for a drive according to DSP417.

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
n
Virtual terminal for a position encoder according to DSP417.

.u
Position system

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Load measurement Virtual terminal for a load measurement system according to DSP417.

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

Virtual terminal for a door controller according to DSP417 (door 1).

.u
Door 1

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
Door 2 Virtual terminal for a door controller according to DSP417 (door 2).
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

Virtual terminal for a door controller according to DSP417 (door 3).

.u
Door 3

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
w
COP display Virtual terminal for TSE board in COP on control bus (CAN bus 1) according

n
w

w
f
n

.u
to DSP417

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Select node ID of TSE

w
Node ID
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

Start terminal Start virtual terminal with ENTER

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
Virtual terminal for display in LOP on shaft bus (CAN bus 2) according to

w
LOP display

n
w

f
n

.u
DSP417

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Node ID Select node ID of ESE

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
Select branch number of ESE
f

Branch No.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Start virtual terminal with ENTER

p
Start terminal

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Setting of the menu languages (depending on the HSE version maybe not
f

Set language
.u

t.c
-li

w
all languages are available)
w

p
w

f
n
p

English Menu Language English

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Deutsch Menu Language German

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Menu Language Dutch

-li
Nederlands
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w Menu Language Turkish
Türk

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u

.c
French Menu Language
w

France
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w

Russia Russian menu language (only available if Cyrillic display is used).

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
80/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
3. Commisioning

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

3.1 Setup Mode

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
During assembly, the controller is in setup mode. This is done by setting the parameter
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u
"Setup ready" to the value "No" (menu group "General paramet.").

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

In setup mode, various monitoring functions of the lift controller are disabled. This makes it
t.c

w
w

p
w

possible, for example, to proceed the lift without connecting the trailing cable by the

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

emergency recall operation pushes (assuming that all components which are absolutely

p
w
w

necessary for moving the lift are connected and the safety circuit is closed) .

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
In setup mode, a very careful work is required due to the deactivation of some

w
w

f
n

security functions within the controller.

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
In particular, note that the lift in the setup mode at inspection control passes over the
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

end floors .
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
3.2 Testing of individual input and output functions
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

After assembly and wiring ,individual control functions can be tested via the hardware test. In

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

the hardware test menu (see detailed description in the chapter "Troubles shooting"),
.u

t.c
-li

p
individual control outputs can be set and thus the correct connection of the control
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

components are checked. At the same control inputs can be set manually and thus checked
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

within the hardware test, whether the lift controller detects these inputs correctly.
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

The handheld terminal DSE is especially helpful when testing and commissioning, because
p

.u
li
w
.u

.c

the handheld terminal can be connected right on the inspection box (plug on the FVE) .
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

3.3 Setup of car doors

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

Before teach-in of the lift controller the function of the car doors must be checked.
ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

A first inspection may also be carried out here through the hardware test menu (see above).
ift

li
w
.u

.c

By manually setting of the outputs to close or open the door it can be tested here whether the
p-
w
w

ft

door is moving in the right direction; by manually pressing (if available) the mechanical limit
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

switch, it can be determined whether these are configured correctly.

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

A complete door test can then be performed using the Control Menu "Door commands".
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

3.4 Teach-in
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

3.4.1 Starting normal operation for lifts with magnetic switch positioning
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

For lifts with magnetic switch positioning no further calibration of the lift is required. Here,
.c
li
w

w
p-

only the parameter "Setup ready" is set to the value "Yes" and so the normal operation
ft
w

li
w

starts.
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

81/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Braking and stopping distances as well as flush positions are then adjusted by shifting the

-li
w
.u

.c

w
corresponding magnets in these lifts.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
3.4.2 Teach-in procedure by lifts with incremental encoder
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
3.4.2.1 Lifts with more than 2 floors
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Before starting the calibration process, it is essential to measure accurately switching-on-

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
zone of the leveling switch SGM on the 2nd floor and to enter this value in parameter "Vane

.u

.c
-li
w

p
length" in the menu "General param.". By this setting the lift controller is able to determine

ft
p

.u
-li
w
automatically the resolution of the encoder (parameter "Incr./m").
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

The lift must be leveled in the lowest floor when starting the teach-in procedure (level switch

p
w
w

SGM must be switched on). The teach-in starts through the menu item "Teach in trip" -
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

"Complete". The lift then moves upwards through the shaft to save the floor positions (center

w
w

p
w

n
between the two switching points of SGM). After that several trips with different speeds are

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

automatically carried out to determine the braking and stopping distances.

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

After the complete teach-in trip, the parameters can be saved by pressing ENTER; the lift is
w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
then ready for operation. If the switching points of the leveling switch SGM were not set

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
exactly symmetrical to the level position, a flush correction is still to be done.
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
3.4.2.1 Lifts with 2 floors
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

For lifts with just 2 floors, the encoder resolution (parameter "Incr. /m") must be determined

w
w

f
n

manually before starting the teach-in trip.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
The easiest way is to set the parameter "Incr./m" first to a value of 1000. Then the state
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
display 4 may be selected (home display, then selected with cursor keys) to notice the
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

current position (displayed at this time in brackets) . As next the lift has to be moved 1m as
.c
-li
w

p
w

accurately as possible (e.g. by inspection control; best done by markings the positions on
ft
w

.u
li
w

the guide rail). Then read the new position in the state display 4 and enter the position
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

difference as parameter "Incr./m".

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

After that, the learning journey can be carried out as described above.
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

3.4.3 Teach-in procedure by lifts with absolute encoder w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w

3.4.3.1 Setting the floor positions

.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

If the floor positions are known (e.g. from the shaft drawing), then these values can be
n

.u

.c
li
w

entered; either in the "Floor height" menu as an absolute value or the "Floor distances" menu
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

as a relative value.
li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

If the values are not known, the floor position can be measured in the menu "Measurement".
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

For this purpose, the lift can be operated with either the emergency recall operation pushes
w

ft
w
w

ft

li
w

or inspection control pushes as well as with the sub menu "Travel movements" to the
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

individual floors. If the lift is well levelled (difference to floor level should not be greater than
w

ft
n

.u
li
w

50mm), then the floor number is entered and the menu item "Measure floor" is selected to
.u

.c

p-

w
w

measure the floor position. This process can be performed in any order and repeated any
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

number of times; the important thing is that each level must be measured at least once.
w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

82/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
3.4.3.2 Setting the reference point

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
Since the magnetic tape of the absolute encoder or the encoder itself does not start at 0 by

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
the lowest floor, a reference point must be chosen then. For this purpose, the lift must be put
.c

ft
w

p
in any floor. The floor number is then entered in the "Set reference" menu and
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

thereafter, the reference point is set by selecting the sub menu "Set reference".

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

3.4.3.3 Measure braking distances

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u
After setting the floor positions like described above a reset should be performed via the

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
menu item "Reset HSE" (alternatively, cut off power supply).
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

By selecting the menu item "Brake distances" the measurement of the brake and stop

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

distances starts fully automatically with the different lift speeds in both directions.

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

After completion of the test runs, the parameters are stored with ENTER; the lift is then ready

w
w

p
w

w
for operation.
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
3.5 Flush correction w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
Through the flush correction, deviations can be easily corrected in the flush position after
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

teach-in (same procedure for both incremental and absolute encoders).

t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Before starting the level correction it is important, however, that the drive (e.g. VVVF) is
w

p
w

n
up

properly set so that the lift always stops in about the same position in each floor.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

Therefore it is advisable to call the State display 4 and then let the lift perform various trips
.u

t.c
-li

p
(e.g. by starting "Test runs"). In order to achieve a good flush, it is necessary that a minimum
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

deviation is indicated in the state display 4 after the lift stops in a floor (indicated by "DFP =
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

xxx mm"). The difference should not be greater than +-2mm if using a VVVF; otherwise an
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

accurate level correction is not possible. For larger deviations the settings of the drive should
w

p
w

ft
w

be pre-optimized and then the braking distances to be re-measured.

p

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

3.5.1 Flush correction by car operation panel COP w

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

For this purpose, the sub-menu item "via COP" is started. The lift disables landing calls,
w

li
w
.u

opens the car doors and turns on the emergency lights.

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

By entering a car call the lift can now be moved to the floor to be corrected. There, the
.c

w
p-

ft
w

deviation of the car from the flush position is measured. If the lift stands too high, then the
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-

door open button is pressed multiple times (once per mm deviation). Between the individual
w
w

ft

button presses there is at least 1 second to wait. As acknowledgment the emergency light
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

turns off shortly; only after the emergency light is switched on again the button should be
p-

ft
w
ft

pressed again.
li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

If the lift stands too low, then the car call button of the current floor is pressed as described
.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

above.
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

This procedure can be repeated as often in any order of the floors.

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

The process is terminated by pressing the ENTER button on the HSE; the parameters are
w
.u

.c
li
w

thereby stored.
w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

83/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
3.5.1 Flush correction by keypad of HSE or handheld terminal DSE

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
This procedure should be especially selected if it is possible to plug in the handheld terminal
n

.u

.c
-li
w
on the FVE and operate it from inside the cabin.
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

After starting the sub-menu item "via terminal" the lift disables the landing calls and opens

p
w

ft

n
p

the car door.

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
Using the cursor keys and ENTER, a floor can now be selected. When the lift reaches the

.u

.c
-li
w

p
destination floor, the deviation of the car from the flush position is measured. This value is

ft
p

.u
-li
w
entered using the arrow keys and pressing the ENTER key, whereby at a too low car
.u

t.c

w
w
position, a positive ,and at a too high car position, a negative value is entered (also appears

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

as an indication on the LCD display).

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

The bottom line also displays the deviation of the car from the currently in the controller

w
w

p
w

n
stored level position; this should be as described above as small as possible, otherwise an

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

accurate level correction is not possible.

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

The process can be repeated any number of times in any order. A final separate storage is
w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
not necessary here, since the values are stored in non-volatile immediately after each entry.

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

4. Error diagnosis
.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

4.1 General procedure for troubleshooting

t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

The lift controller software of MLC 8000 includes a comprehensive self-diagnostics. Faults
.u

t.c
-li

p
w

that have occurred are stored in an error stack and can be accessed via keyboard and LCD
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

display of the HSE or the hand-held terminal.

.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

However, the HSE can not diagnose all faults clearly. For example, when the photocell is
w

p
w

ft
w

constantly interrupted, then the lift control can not determine whether the light barrier is
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

defective or improperly connected or whether the light barrier is actually permanently, e.g. is
p-

w
w
w

ft

interrupted by a person or an object in the door. This aspect must be strictly observed during
w
.u

.c
li
w

w
troubleshooting.
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

In inspection mode disorders might be caused by the lift mechanic part. These error
w

ft

w
n

.u

messages are of course also stored in the controller error stack and can lead to
.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

misjudgments in a later troubleshooting. Therefore, the error stack of the controller should be
w
ift

li
w
.u

cleared after maintenance.

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

At the same time, the integrated real-time clock in the controller should be tested during each
.c

p-

ft
w

inspection. An incorrectly real-time clock or a discharged watch battery on the HSE lead to
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

incorrect time stamps in the error stack and can therefore also lead to incorrect conclusions
w
p-

ft

in troubleshooting.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w

4.2 LED indicators

.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

The lift controller MLC 8000 has some LEDs, which indicate certain control conditions.
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

The LEDs of the individual control modules are listed in the Appendix. The main board HSE
w
p-

ft
w

has 3 LEDs driven by the software:

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

84/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
"RUN" LED: When this LED flashes every second, the software of this

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
module is running (The lift controller can of course still have

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
a fault at this time).
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
The "RUN" LED is on (almost) every control module.

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

"FAU" (fault) LED : : The lift is currently in an error state.

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

In the absence of this fault, the lift will automatically return to

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

normal operation.

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

"MAI" (maintenance) LED: Maintenance is necessary.

w
w

p
w

w
This LED is also set if, for example, the lift is still in
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
operation, but an ESE or TSE module is defective or become

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
more frequent in error (see "Error Warning")
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
The 4th LED on the module HSE is not controlled by the software, but indicates the presence
-li
w

w
w
w

of the electronics supply voltage 5V.

p

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
4.3 Initial troubleshooting using state display 1
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
Basic statements about actual controller state can be made based on the state display 1:
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

- Is the lift in normal operation or in error state?

t.c

w
w

- Is the safety circuit available?

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

- Is the lift inside door zone?

w

p
w

- Are special features enabled?

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

- .....

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
Further troubleshooting can be made on the basis of the state display 1 .

p
w

ft
w

.u
The precise structure of the individual state displays is described in detail in the section
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
"State displays".
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

4.4 Overview HSE state

w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

The actual state of the lift controller is always displayed in lowest line of the state display 1:

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

HSE state Description

w

ft
w
ift

Emer.Stop
li
w

Emergency stop triggered, waiting for standstill

.u

.c

p-
w

Init
w

Initialization procedure of all PCB’s on CAN bus after power on

ft

n
n

.u

.c

Search
li
w

Requesting actual state of all module after power on

.c

p-

ft
w

Standstil
ft

Normal operation mode: Lift is standstill in floor level

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

Moving Normal operation mode: Lift is moving

w
p-

ft

Arrival
n

.u

Normal operation mode: Lift is slowing down to levelling speed

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

Error
ft
w

Error state, detailled information see error stack

w

ft

li
w
.u

CAN-Error
.c
li
w

Data transmission error on CAN bus

p-
w
p-

ft

Inspect. Lift is in inspection mode

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

Em.recall
p-

Lift is in emergency electrical recall operation mode

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

Lift out of operation due to frequent or fatal errors; detailled information see
.c
li
w

!Repair!
p-

error stack
ft
w

Terminal
li
w
.u

Travel commands active via HSE keypad

.c

p-
w

PCB fault
w

ft

At least 1 PCB not available on CAN bus; for detailed informations see
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

85/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
error stack

-li
w
.u

.c
Starting

w
Normal operation mode: Lift is starting a trip

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
wLift between 2 floors (e.g. after inspection mode or after an error); starting
.c

w
Leveling

ft
w
to next floor level.

p
ft

-li
w
.u
Teach in

.c
-li

Calibration process (Tech in) active

p
w

ft

n
SL error
p

Primary safety line interrupted

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Door err. Error cabin door

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Door open

-li
w
Lift between 2 floors with open car door

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
Only lifts with magnetic switch positioning or incremental encoder
p

.u
-li
w
.u

positioning: Reference run to reset switch SGE or pre-limit switch VO / VU.

t.c

w
w
Refer.Run

p
w

Until reference run position of cabin is unknown for the lift controller.

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Setup Teach-in not done (Setup state)

p
w
w

f
n

.u
Error message (by digital signal or by CAN bus) from drive (frequency

-li
w
.u

t.c

Driveerr.

w
inverter, hydraulic system, …)
w

p
w

n
ErrRelAct

w
f
cn

.u
Error while re-levelling, e.g. bypassing of door switches not working well

t.c
-li
w

w
CAN-DRV
w
w

CAN bus connection to drive (e.g. frequency inverter) interrupted

p

f
n

-li
SL ontrip w
.u

t.c

Safety line interrupted while lift was moving

w

p
w

Cont.err.

n
Error contactor supervising (e.g. contactor stucks)
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Brakeerr.
t.c

w
Error brake supervising (e.g. brake contact not working)

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

Error message (CAN bus or digital signal) from drive (e.g. frequency
.u

t.c
-li

Drivetrip
w

p
inverter, hydraulic system, …) while moving
w

n
up

f
n

.u
CAN-FVE

t.c
-li
w

CAN bus connection to FVE interrupted

t.c

w
w

CAN-ASE
p

f
CAN bus connection to ASE interrupted
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

CAN bus connection to PSE interrupted (Positioning unit, e.g. AWG

w

p
w

CAN-PSE
p

magnetic tape system)

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
Upper pre-limit switch VO not switched or switched in wrong floor (e.g. floor
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

counting error by magnetic switch positioning – check also SGO and SGU
.u

.c
-li
w

Error VO
w

p
switch)
w

ft
w

.u
li
w

Lower pre-limit switch VU not switched or switched in wrong floor (e.g. floor
.u

.c

p-

w
w

counting error by magnetic switch positioning – check also SGO and SGU
w

ft

w
.u

Error VU
.c
li
w

switch)
w
p-

ft

Err.VOU
w

Both pre-limit switches Vo and VU on at the same time

n

li
w
.u

Overtemp.
.c

.
p-

Motor overheated (Motor thermistor state)

w
w
w

ft

Brakechk. w
n

Brake shoes in bad conditions

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
SL rev.dr
p-

ft

Lift between 2 doors with open revolving door (safety line contact open)
w
ift

li
w

SCcardoor
.u

Lift between 2 doors with open car door (safety line contact open)
.c

p-
w
w

SL shdoor
ft

Lift between 2 doors with open shaft door (safety line contact open)
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

Door zone switch SGM is on, while lift is not in door zone regarding to
p-

ft
w

Doorz.err
ft

information from positioning system

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

Door zone switch SGM is off, while lift is in door zone regarding to
p-

ft

Zone err.
n

.u

information from positioning system

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

Supervising contact of safety relay KH5 not closed (KH5 not off) while lift is
w

ft

li
w

KH5 n.on
.u

inside door zone

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

Supervising contact of safety relay KH5 not off (KH5 not on) while lift is
n

.u
li
w

KH5 n.off
.u

outside door zone

.c

p-

w
w

Accupower
w

ft

Battery mode, main power supply (24V) off

w
.u

.c
li
w

Car light
w

Car light power is off

p-

ft
w

Overload Overload state (signal from load measuring unit)

li
w
.u

.c

p-

Relevel.
w

Re-levelling in work
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

86/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

p
No CANbus

n
CAN bus connection failed complete

-li
w
.u

.c
Trip time

w
Runtime monitoring according to EN81

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
wDoor test mode (activated by pressing inspection up and down together for
.c

ft
Doortest
w

p
5s or by HSE keypad (“Door commands”)
ft

-li
w
.u
Limit sw.

.c
-li

Lift in final limit switch

p
w

ft

n
UPS evac.
p

Automatic UPS evacuation

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Saf. beam

w
Safety light beam interrupted

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
Overspeed

.u
Overspeed normal operation or overspeed re-levelling

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
Lift moved in wrong direction while travelling or positioning system did
p

.u
-li
Wrong dir w
.u

count in wrong direction

t.c

w
w

p
Hyd.Press
w

n
Hydraulic pressure too high or too low (digital signal)

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Wrong state of reset switch SGE in relation to actual floor.

p
w
w

f
n

.u
Error could also caused by floor counting error (e.g. problem with SGO /

-li
w
.u

t.c

Err. SGE

w
SGU or with incremental encoder)
w

p
w

w
Em.homing
f
cn

.u
Homing trip to lowest floor in case of an error (hydraulic lifts only)

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

Error from slick control system (difference between the 2 position

p

f
n

-li
Slick >> w
.u

measurement systems on motor and car)

t.c

p
Pos.error
w

n
Error on positioning system (e.g. AWG magnetic tape error)
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Emergency stop push pressed (only, if emergency stop push has 2.

w
w

f
n

Contact which is connected to lift controller input; in this case also number

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Stoppush
w
of emergency stop push is displayed)

p
w

n
up

Setuptrip
n

.u
Lift in setup mode (assembly mode)

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Serv.mode
w

Input „Service mode“ activated

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

Insp. pit
t.c
-li

Lift in inspection pit mode

w

p
w

Deadm.off
p

Deadman control mode active

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
Error on 2. Positionin system (only if double AWG is used as positioning

w
w

p
w

f
n

Saf.unit

-li
w
f

system)
.u

.c
-li
w

Shelter
w

p
Safety space was opened (Shaft door manually opened). Reset necessary.
w

ft
w

.u
Apron
li
w

Foldable apron unfolded

.u

.c

p-

w
w

Evac-wait
w

ft

Evacuation mode activated; lift is waiting for start signal

n

w
.u

.c
li
w

Railing Foldable railing on car roof unfolded

w
p-

ft
w

Phase err
n

Phase error or phase sequence error

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
Bearer
w

Bearer for safety space active or bearer error

w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

Only lifts with incremental encoder: Difference between position measured

.c

w
p-

Pos.diff
ft
w

by incremental encoder and door zone switch SGM (e.g. by slick)

ift

li
w
.u

Hold.err.
.c

Error on holding system (pawl device)

p-
w
w

ft

Hold.in Holding bolt are retracted

n

.u

.c
li
w

Hold.out
.c

p-

Holding bolt are extended

w

ft
w
ft

Raise up
li
w

Lift is moving upward from holding bolts

.u

.c
li

p-
w

Hold.pos
p-

ft

Lift is moving toward holding bolts (to holding position)

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

Hold.test
.u

Test mode for holding bolts activated (by switch)

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

Hydraulic lift with holding device (pawl device): Low pressure even if lift
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

Hold.pres
p-

controller did re-pump

w
p-

ft
n

.u

Holded signal did not switch off while lift was moving upwards from holding
li
w
.u

.c

Hold.err
p-

bolts
w
w

ft

No hold
.u

No holded signal while lift was moving down to holding bolts

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

Lift is located between 2 floors; error while diving to next floor (diving not
n

li
w

Divingerr
.u

possible)
.c

p-
w
w

Governor
ft

Wrong feedback signal from over speed governor (coil) or any other UCM
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

87/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
actor

-li
w
.u

.c
SL start

w
Safety line shafts door off while lift wants to start a trip (shaft door lock)

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
OP go in

.c
-li
wOperation lift: Operation device is retracting
.c

ft
w
OP is in

p
Operation lift: Operation device is retracted
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
OP turn.
-li

Operation lift: Operation device is turning

p
w

ft

n
OP go out
p

Operation lift: Operation device is extending

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

OP is out

ft
Operation lift: Operation device is extended
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
OP ramp

.u
Operation lift: Operation device is locked

.c
-li
w

p
w
OP error

ft
Operation lift: Operation device error
p

.u
-li
w
.u

Rampdrive
t.c

Lift in ramp drive mode

w
w

p
w

n
VVVF para

w
Drive parameters not synchronized between lift controller and inverter
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
ASE" Softw

p
Used ASE software incompatible with HSE software

w
w

f
n

.u
FVE" Softw

-li
w
.u

Used FVE software incompatible with HSE software

t.c

w
w
Tech.test

p
w

n
Menu Technical Test started

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

CAN-Door CAN bus connection to CANopen door drive interrupted

w
w
w

f
Uncontr.m
n

Uncontrolled movement (UCM) detected

-li
w
.u

t.c

No decel.
w
Deceleration control circuit triggered

p
w

n
f
n

.u
Valveerr.

t.c
-li
w

Valve error (valve feedback contact)

t.c

w
w
w

Lock test
p

Shaft door lock test state (activated by input function “Dr. lock test”)

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

AWG error
-li

Error message from absolute position encoder

w

p
w

n
SC-PSU
up

f
n

Safety circuit interrupted by PSU (e.g. Limax33CP)

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Time-limited demo modus of the lift controller; for activation please contact
w

f
n

Demo mode

-li
w
f

.u

INTEC GmbH
t.c
-li

p
w

Starting a trip in „Quick start” mode (motor will be powered and brake will
p

f
n

.u
Quickstrt
-li
w
.u

already opened even doors are still not completely closed)

t.c

t.
w
w

Battery
p
w

f
n

Battery defective (Measurement of battery voltage every 24 hours)

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

Light scr Light screen permanently interrupted or error signal from light screen
w

p
w

ft
w

Pallet ->
n

.u
Pallet lift: Pallet is extended
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
Pallet <-
w

Pallet lift: Pallet is retracted

w

ft

w
.u

Pal.limit
.c
li
w

Pallet lift: Emergency limit switch of pallet hook triggered

w
p-

ft
w

Emergency rescue mode: Monitoring of brakes / contactors / valves

n

li
w
.u

Rescue
.c

.
deactivated
p-

w
w
w

ft

SL bypass Bypass switch safety line doors activated w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

Bypass SC
w
p-

Error on monitoring contacts bypass switch safety line doors

w

ft
w
ift

Gear off
li
w

Safety gear contact triggered (Reset necessary)

.u

.c

p-
w

Bef.Gear
w

ft

Primary safety line (before safety gear) interrupted

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

SC door Safety line car door errornous bypassed

.c

p-

ft
w

LS error
ft

Light screen error (only by light screen with test signal)

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

Ramp off
w

Error on shaft door lock contact (only if 2. contact exists)

p-

ft

n
n

.u

Safety in
.c
li
w

Controller input function „Safety fct.” activated

.u

.c

p-

ft

Braketest
w

Automatic brake test active

w

ft

li
w
.u

Brake err
.c
li
w

p-

Error detected during automatic brake test

w
p-

ft

Insp.pos
n

Automatic trip to inspection start position

.u
li
w
.u

.c

Valvetest
p-

Automatic valve test active

w
w

ft

Valve err
.u

Error detected during automatic valve test

.c
li
w

w
p-

Door rev.
ft
w

Door permanently blocked (mechanical problem)

n

li
w
.u

.c

Start blocked by other moving lifts (special start block mode: only 1 lift can
p-
w
w

Blocked
ft

run at a time; e.g. in case of power failure and power supply by emergency
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

88/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
power generator)

-li
w
.u

.c
Slackrope

w
Slack rope detected (by load measuring device)

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
Rope diff

.c
-li
wRope load difference detected (by load measuring system)
.c

ft
w
Doortemp.

p
Door motor or door controller overtemperature
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
UPS error
-li

UPS defective (Error signal from UPS)

p
w

ft

n
Pist.trip
p

Piston compensation trip (hydraulic lifts with 2 pistons)

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Tuning

ft
Motor tuning mode (VVVF): Brakes stay closed by start signal
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
Pall.err.

.u
Pallet lift: Pallet error detected

.c
-li
w

p
w
Surfing

ft
Monitored landing door was opened without authorization
p

.u
-li
w
.u

UPS charg
t.c

UPS low charging level

w
w

p
w

n
Insp.MR

w
Inspection machine room switched on
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Max.load

p
Maximum load detected (load measuring system)

w
w

f
n

.u
Setup PSU

-li
w
.u

PSU (e.g. Limax33CP) in Setup mode (no teach-in done)

t.c

w
w
No param.

p
w

n
Incoorect parameter value (at least 1 parameter out of range)

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

This message is displayed (flashing) if:

w
w
w

f
n

- One or more ESE or TSE boards are defective (the lift usually still

-li
w
.u

t.c

moves in this case)

w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
- Many different errors occurred (but usually they do not lead to a

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
!Mainten.
w
shutdown of the lift)
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

4.5 Overview HSE call state

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

If lift is not in normal call mode (not all calls enabled), in line 2 of state display the actual call

w
w

f
n

state is displayed instead of the actual operation time:

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
HSE call state Description
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

Firemen
p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li

Fire ev.
w

p
w

ft
w

Emer.run
p

.u
li
w
.u

.c

VIP run
p-

w
w
w

ft

Spec.run w
.u

.c
li
w

w
Lift off
p-

ft
w

li

Int.door
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

Rem. off
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

Land.off
.c

w
p-

ft
w

Car full
ift

li
w
.u

.c

Parktrip
p-
w
w

ft

Cl.run 1
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

Cl.run 2
p-

ft
w
ft

li
w

Cl.run 3
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

Cl.run 4
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

Cl.run 5
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

Earthqu.
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

Car att.
p-
w
p-

ft

Autocall
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

Up peak
w
w
w

ft

Downpeak
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

Deadman
w

ft
w

li
w

Off-Disp
.u

.c

p-
w

Evacuat.
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

89/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Config.1

-li
w
.u

.c

w
Config.2

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
Config.3 w
.c

ft
w
Config.4

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

Config.5

p
w

ft

n
p

Haz.trip
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Handicap

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Ev.contr

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
Em.Evac.

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
Main.int w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
Main.nec.
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Simulat. Blinking

p
w
w

Groupoff

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

Spec.VIP

w
w

p
w

w
Overload
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Goods

w
w

f
n

-li
Belt.int w
.u

t.c

p
Startbl.
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Testmode
t.c

w
w
w

Max-load

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Slackrop
w

p
w

n
up

Ropediff
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
4.6 Error stack w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

Within the error stack the last 50 errors with timestamp are stored. However, it will not
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

appear in the error stack when an error is removed again.

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

Each error is displayed within 2 lines. In the upper line the date and time of the occurrence of
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
this error is displayed ("timestamp"), eg "22.04.15 12:34:45". The next line shows the type of
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
error, for example, "Drive Error". For some errors it is still displayed behind which control
w
w

ft

module has diagnosed the problem. w

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w

Use the cursor keys to scroll in the error stack.

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

By pressing ENTER, you can see more details to the error on which the cursor is currently
.c

w
p-

ft
w

displayed (Example) :
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

Drive error Fault name.

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

The fault name was already displayed before starting error details.
p-

ft
w
ft

Error no. 160/0

li

Internal error number

w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

Module HSE control module, which has diagnosed the error

p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

State Moving Controller state when the error occurred

.u

.c

p-

ft
w

Trips 16391 Trip counter when the error occurred

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

Set speed v3 Selected lift speed:

p-
w
p-

ft

0 at standstill
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

„vRL“: Re-levelling speed

p-

w
w
w

ft

„v0“: Arrival speed

w
.u

.c
li
w

„v1“:Intermediate speed 1 (for short floor distances)

p-

ft
w

„v2“:Intermediate speed 2 (for short floor distances)

li
w
.u

.c

p-

„v3“: Nominal speed

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

90/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
„vI“: Normal Inspection speed

-li
w
.u

.c

w
„vIS“: Slow Inspection speed

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
„vR“ : Fast Electrical recall operation speed

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w
„vRS“ : Slow (normal) Electrical recall operation speed

p
ft

-li
w
.u
„vEE(UPS)“: Evacuation speed (UPS Evacuation)

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
„vHu“: Lift with holding bolts: Up speed from holding bolts
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

„vHd“: Lift with holding bolts: Down speed to holding bolts

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
„vZ1“: Additional intermadiate speed 1

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

„vZ2“: Additional intermadiate speed 2

p
w

ft
p

Dir. Upwards Selected lift direction ("Upwards" , "Downwards" or 0 at Standstill)

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Drivest.Standst. State of drive controller:
w

p
w

w
f

„Stopped“

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
„Start“
w

f
n

.u
-li
„Enable“ w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
„Star/Delta“
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

„Softstarter“

w
w
w

"Targ.ack"

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

„Op.Brake“
w

p
w

n
„Moving“
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
„Slowing“

w
w

f
n

„Stopping“

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
„Cl.Brake“

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
„Sw.off“

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Floor 3
w

Actual floor
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

If the calibration process has not been completed or a required reference

t.c
-li

p
w

movement has not yet been carried out, then here "-" is displayed.
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

Pos. 9312 Actual position in mm

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

Reference position is lowest floor (= 0)

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

If the calibration process has not been completed or a required reference

w

p
w

ft
w

movement has not yet been carried out, then here "-" is displayed.
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
Speed 1200 Actual speed in mm/s
w
w

ft

O.1- 8 ■□■□■□□□ State of outputs 1-8 of HSE(from left, ■ = output is set) w

.u

.c
li
w

I.1- 8 □□■□□□□■
w
State of inputs 1-8 of HSE(from left, ■ = input is set)
p-

ft
w

I.9-16 ■□■□■□□□ State of inputs 9-16 of HSE(from left, ■ = input is set)

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

Calls enabled Calls enabled/disabled

n

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

LC disabled Landing calls enabled/disabled

.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

Start fl. 3 Start floor of actual / last trip

li
w
.u

.c

p-

Target fl. 6 Target floor of actual / last trip

w
w

ft

■■■□
n

.u

SL 1-4 State of safety line (from left):

.c
li
w
.c

p-

- Primary safety circuit

ft
w
ft

li
w

- Safety circuit revolving doors

.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

- Safety circuit car doors

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

- Safety circuit shaft doors

.u

.c

p-

ft

(■ = Voltage present, Safety circuit closed)

w
w

ft

li
w
.u

M|O|U|VO|VU■□■□■
.c
li
w

p-

State of positioning switches (from left):

w
p-

ft

- SGM (level switch)

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

- SGO (upper door zone switch)

p-

w
w
w

ft

- SGU (lower door zone switch)

w
.u

.c
li
w

- VO (upper pre-limit switch)

p-

ft
w

- VU (lower pre-limit switch)

li
w
.u

.c

p-

(■ = switch is turned on)

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

91/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

p
■□■

n
Door 1-max Door state door 1 to 3 (from left):

-li
w
.u

.c
(■ = Door is closed)

p
w

ft

n
(□ = Door is not closed)
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

Dr1 O|C|R|L □■□■

ft
w
State of door signals door 1 (from left):

p
ft

-li
w
.u
- Door open limit switch

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
- Door closed limit switch
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

- Reversing contact
.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
- Light screen

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

(■ = input is set / Light screen is interrupted)

p
w

ft
p

(? = State is unknown, e.g. if communication between HSE and FVE is

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
interrupted)
w

p
w

w
f

(- = signal not present, e.g. door without limit switches)

.u

t.c
-li
w

Dr2 O|C|R|L □■□■

p
w
See door 2
w

f
n

.u
Dr3 O|C|R|L □■□■

-li
See door 3 w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

Load Z|H|F|O■■■□ State of load measurement (from left):

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

- Zero Load (Car empty)

w
w
w

- Half load

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

- Full load (Nominal load)

w

p
w

n
- Overload
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

(■ = Limit reached)
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
Carlight off State od car light w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
+24V Power on 24V power supply

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

on = Power supply available

t.c

w
w

off = Battery power supply

p

f
n

-li
w
f

O1|O2|R↓|R↑ □■□□
.u

t.c
-li

Temperature monitoring (from left):

w

p
w

- Overtemperature 1 (1st temperature sensor)

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

- Overtemperature 2 (2nd temperature sensor)

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

- Machine room temperature below limit

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

- Machine room temperature above limit

w

p
w

ft
w

(■ = Input active – temperature limit reached)

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
Temp.[°C] Actual HSE board temperature (only hardwardversion 1.05)
w
w

ft

w
.u

Intern Internal error counter

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

4.7 Error counter w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

The error counter shows the frequency of each error .

w

ft
w
ift

li
w

When calling the error counter menu, it shows first, since when the errors are counted (the
.u

.c

p-
w

time of the last deletion process of the error counter).

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

After that, the error rate is displayed in one line and the type of error in the next line.
.c

p-

ft
w

With the error counter it can be detected whether certain errors, such as CAN-bus faults or
ft

li
w
.u

.c

door errors occur frequently and it is thereby possible to start troubleshooting before the lift
li

p-
w
p-

ft

goes out of order.

n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

4.8 Behavior of the controller in case of error

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

When the lift controller diagnoses a fault, then the car will, depending on the type of error,
ft
n

.u
li
w

immediately stopped or even attempted to go to the next floor.

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

Then the lift controller enters the error state. Calls are not cleared at this moment. If the
w
p-

ft
w

problem is eliminated again, the lift controller mainly goes back to normal operation.
n

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

92/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Only after a waiting period (parameter " Err.delay[s]" in menu " Timer parameter ") if the

-li
w
.u

.c

w
cause of the error is still there, all calls are cleared and blocked. Inspection control and

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
emergency recall operation remain active even in the event of a fault. Hydraulic lifts

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
evacuate, if possible, in the lowest floor.
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft
4.9 Internal error counter

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

With each occured error an internal error counter is increased by a defined value. The value

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
by which the counter is incremented, depends on the type of error.

.u

.c
-li
w

w
When the error counter reaches the maximum value of 100, then the lift goes out of

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
operation. In state display 1 "defective" appears.
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
When starting any trip the internal error counter is decreased by 1 (unless the value is
-li
w

p
w
w

already 0).
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
This internal error counter is implemented to make sure the lift goes out of operation in case

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

an error occurs very often. On the other side, the lift goes not out of order, if the same error

w
w
w

f
n

occurs only sporadically and at longer intervals.

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

The error counter may be erased (set to 0) by the following actions:

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
- Switching off mains power supply (not necessary to remove HSE battery)
w

f
n

-li
w
f

- Switching on the inspection control

.u

t.c
-li

p
- Switching on the emergency recall operation
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

- Pressing the reset button on the HSE

t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

4.10 Error warning

w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
By single faults the lift may remain in operation because of the error counter as described
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
above.
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

Regardless of that a second counter is incremented by a similar mode, which outputs an

w

.u
li
w
.u

error warning when it reaches a certain value. Then "Maintenance!" Indication appears in the
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

status display 1 alternating with the current lift state.

n

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

If this text is displayed, error memory and error stack should be studied carefully in order to
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

identify any "creeping" faults on time before a total failure of the controller happens and it can

w
w
w

ft

be fixed. w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

If there is a failure of ESE or TSE module the message "Maintenance" is displayed

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

immediately ,regardless of the current state of the counter. Through this text it is therefore
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c

pointed to defect TSE / ESE-assemblies because the lift remains in operation in this case.
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

Then it can be tested with "Hardware Test" (see next chapter) which modules have failed.
.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

4.11 Hardware test of the individual controller boards

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w

With the keyboard and the LCD display of the HSE or the handheld terminal a very effective
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

hardware test of the individual modules can be performed.

w

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

If, for example, the firefighters function does not work, then it should first checked whether
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

the corresponding controller input is activated when the fire button is pressed
w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

93/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
At the same time, the outputs of the individual modules may be activated individually in order

-li
w
.u

.c

w
to test whether, for example, indicator lights or relays are properly connected.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
After starting the hardware test, the inputs and outputs of the selected module are displayed.
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
For inputs and outputs, which are assigned to a function, a corresponding letter appears (the

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
meaning of these letters is explained in the chapter "Input and output parameters").
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

If an input or output is switched off, then a small letter is displayed, a switched on input or

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

output is displayed by a capital letter. For inputs and outputs to which no function has been

p
w

ft
assigned, "-" is displayed as long as the input / output is not activated and "ε", if the input /
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

output is enabled.

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Using the cursor keys the cursor can be moved between the individual inputs and outputs. If

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
the cursor is on an output, then by pressing the key "0" the state of the output can be
.u

t.c

w
w
changed (activate / deactivate). For the outputs 1-8 the state can be changed directly by

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
pressing the corresponding button "1" to “8”.
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
By pressing the ENTER key ↵ the detailed function of the corresponding input or output is
.u

t.c

p
w

n
displayed and can also be changed here.
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
The hardware test can be carried out during normal operation. However, activation

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
or deactivation of individual outputs may result in malfunctions. Therefore, the
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

hardware test usually should be performed only when the lift is at a standstill (e.g by
t.c
-li

p
w

switching on the emergency recall operation switch).

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

Outputs, whose status has been changed during the hardware tests, retain this

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

status until this output will be activated or deactivated by a new control action.
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

94/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
4.12 Troubleshooting at CAN bus faults

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
The fault diagnosis by the lift controller only works as long as the CAN bus connection
.c

ft
w

p
ft

between the individual control modules works.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

Even if errors in the data transmission are displayed in the error stack of the controller, the
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

reason can only be found through a systematic approach.

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
At this point once again it has to be pointed out that the lift controller has 2 separate CAN

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
bus systems: w
.u

t.c

w
w
- Control bus

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
- Shaft bus
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

In addition, some drives can also be connected via the RS485 bus (only if main board MCU
t.c

w
w

p
w

n
is used).

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

For group of lifts (in some cases also single lifts with large hoisting height or large floor

-li
w
.u

t.c

number), the shaft bus can be divided into individual branches by the bus coupler (CBK). In
w

p
w

n
f
n

this case, the shaft bus is physically divided into different segments, but logically, it is for the

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
lift controller still 1 shaft bus system.
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
If the data transfer on a CAN bus is totally disturbed, then the error "Bus off" appears. In this
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

case, even the hand-held terminal can no longer be used to diagnose problems, but it is still
t.c

w
w

possible to work with the keyboard and the LCD display on the HSE.

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

If a data transfer is possible, but some individual modules like FVE, TSE or ESE are missing,
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

the CAN bus connection can be checked by hardware test menu.

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
If an assembly does not appear here, then it can have different causes:

p
w

ft
w

.u
- The corresponding module is defective
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
- The bus cable to this module is not connected correctly
w
w

ft

w
.u

- The node number of the module is not set correctly

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

If the data traffic on the CAN bus is totally disturbed, then the following procedure is
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

recommended:
n

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

1. Switch off the power supply and measure the resistance between the two CAN bus lines
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-

Cx+ and Cx- with a multimeter. If the CAN bus cable is connected correctly, then the
w
w

ft

resistance is approximately 60Ω.

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

For this the CAN bus line is terminated by a 120Ω resistor on each end (resulting
p-

ft
w
ft

resistance is 60 Ω). This resistor is located on each PCB and may be activated by a
li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

jumper (see description of each module in the annex of this manual).

p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

The termination resistor of the FVE module version 1.01 is always activated. So in
w

ft

li
w
.u

some lift installations the CAN bus resistance may be 40Ω. However, the CAN bus
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

will work without problems in this case.

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

2. Check the shield connection of the bus cable (if shielded cable used): The screen should
w
.u

.c
li
w

be only connected on one side to 0(24V), preferably in the control cabinet. At the same
w
p-

ft
w

time, the GND of power supply 0(24V) must be connected to PE at a single point (also in
li
w
.u

.c

p-

the control cabinet).

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

95/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
3. Check that the two CAN bus lines CX+ and CX- are not reversed at any point and the bus

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
cable is properly clamped.

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
4. Then switch on power supply again and check the communication in the hardware test

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
menu.
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

5. If the CAN bus is still totally disturbed, then step by step, all bus modules should be

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

separated from the CAN bus and tested by menu item "Hardware test" whether the other

p
w

ft
p

modules can communicate with each other. So it can be determined which of the modules
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

may be defect.

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
If individual components are separated from the CAN bus, then it should always be

p
w
w

f
n

.u
taken into consideration that both cable ends are terminated with a 120Ω resistor

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
(activated by jumper at the last module on each end of the CAN bus). However, the

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
CAN bus works for testing purposes even if there is only a termination resistor at one
-li
w

w
w
w

end of the CAN bus activated, but it should be completed in normal operation always
p

f
n

-li
w
.u

at both sides.
t.c

p
w

n
Are both ends of the cable open (no terminating resistor), then the CAN-Bus does not
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

work!
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

It should be noted that the CAN bus data transfer may also be disturbed by external

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

influences (shielded motor cables, missing suppressors on contactors, relays, brake

t.c

w
w

f
magnets, and so on). These factors must be included within the troubleshooting.
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
For interference suppression (EMC) it is particularly important that coils (e.g. relays,

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
brake, contactors) have a corresponding suppressor capacitor or similar. So the coil of
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
the mechanical motor brake at roped lifts should necessarily be suppressed with a

p
w

ft
w

.u
varistor. It should be noted that the suppressor is located as close as possible to the
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

coil.
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

Node ID:
li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

Each module, which is connected to the CAN bus, has its own node ID number. At each of
.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft

the two CAN buses (control bus, shaft bus) each number must be unique, otherwise there
w
ift

li
w

will be disturbances in the data transmission, which are difficult to diagnose.

.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

Since TSE and ESE modules are used at different CAN busses (control bus, shaft bus), it is
.c

p-

ft
w

allowed that a TSE as well as an ESE have the same node ID number.
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

The following error messages may be displayed when a node number is assigned twice:
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

- "CAN faulty xxx" (Module xxx has trouble sending / receiving data on the CAN bus)
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w

- "CAN bus off xxx" (Module xxx turns because of frequent disturbances temporarily from the
p-

ft
n

.u

CAN bus.)
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

- "No connect. xxx" (No CAN bus connection to the module xxx)
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

The big problem with duplicate node ID numbersin a CAN bus network is that the 2
w

li
w
.u

modules with the same node ID number interfere with each other and thereby disturb
.c

p-
w
w

ft

the entire bus. This may cause that other modules can no longer send messages. As a
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

96/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
result, error messages appear from modules that actually work correctly.

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
Mostly a duplicate node ID number can be diagnosed with the menu "hardware test". If

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
individual components are displayed partly as available, partly as absent, then this may
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
assign to a duplicate node number.

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

The node ID number can only be assigned freely to TSE, ESE and CBK - modules . In the
.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

HSE and the FVE, the node number can not be changed. The assemblies PSE and ASE are

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

also simultaneously assigned to the appropriate function by assigning the node ID number.

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

The node number of a TSE or ESE board can be tested in the following way:

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
- Disconnect all other TSE or ESE modules from the bus

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
- Start menu "hardware test" and read number of TSE / ESE
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
Example: Hardware test TSE:
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

---*----
t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

In the displayed example the TSE board has the node ID number 4.
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

4.13 Apparent errors by anti misuse detection or special functions

w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

The lift controller MLC 8000 has a variety of functions to call-misuse detection. When
t.c

w
w

checking the lift controller it should therefore always take care that apparent errors can also

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

be the result of misuse detection or of a special function.

w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

Example: The lift controller always accepts only one call, any more operated car command is

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

ignored.

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
Possible cause: The " Max.CC no ." parameter is set to 1 and thus limits the number of car
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
calls.
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

4.14 Troubleshooting at the interface to external components

w

li
w
.u

.c

.
External control components (eg frequency, door control units) which are not directly part of
p-

w
w
w

ft

the lift controller MLC 8000 can even recognize or cause errors, which are difficult to w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
diagnose. For example, the lift controller monitors the signal sequence of VVFF connected
p-

ft
w
ift

via digital signals, while, conversely, the VVVF monitors the signal sequence of the lift
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

controller. This monitoring is carried out partly in millisecond range and therefore it is
w

ft

n
n

.u

sometimes difficult to understand what actually was the cause of an error message now.
.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

To make it easier to detect errors, it is possible, to increase all monitoring times of the lift
.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

controller several times so that it is possible to measure digital signals by multimeter before
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

all signals are switched off due to an elapsed monitoring time.

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

Example:
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

To start a trip the HSE switches on first the "Enable" signal of the VVVF. Then the lift
w
w
w

ft

controller waits for the "Ready" signal of the inverter. If this feedback signal is not set within
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

the specified time (parameter "Ready=1"; default 1s), then the HSE disables the signal again
w

ft
w

li
w

and generates an error message. Within this second, it is hardly possible to measure if the
.u

.c

p-
w

"Enable" signal reaches the VVVF correctly or whether the VVVF activates the "Ready"
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

97/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
signal , but is connected incorrectly to the HSE .

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
By setting the parameter "Ready=1" now to a value of 30 seconds, there is enough time to

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
measure the signals with a multimeter.
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
Another way to diagnose theses error is to set individual signals by the menu "Hardware test"
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

or, for example, to switch on contactors manually and to control the feedback signals.
.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

4.15 Fault output

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
Any one or more outputs of the HSE, FVE, TSE or ESE can be configured as fault message
.u

t.c

w
w
output.

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

When an error has occurred then, after a time delay (parameter " Err.delay[s]"), these
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

outputs are enabled.

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

98/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
4.16 Error messages

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
Nr. w
Error message Description Lift controller reaction
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
16/1 AWG Band decekt magnetic tape of the absolute Check tape and change if

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

encoder AWG defective necessary.

p
w

ft

n
p

For a detailed error analysis see

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
manual of AWG

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
16/16 Gen.error Test input “Spec.funct.”- No further reaction, only for test

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w
“Gen.error” activated purposes.

ft
p

.u
-li
32/112 AWG defect w
positioning system (absolute Emergency stop
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

encoder AWG) defective Lift continues operation if AWG

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

has reset the error.

p
w
w

For a detailed error analysis see

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

manual of AWG.

w
w

p
w

n
35/0 Overcurrent

w
Overcurrent or short circuit on For information only; check wiring
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
any output of this PCB and PCB

w
w

f
n

49/0 Phase off

-li
w
Phase error (signal of an Emergency stop; then out of
.u

t.c

w
external power supply monitor service

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
device)
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

49/1 Car light off Car light power supply is Rope lift: Stop in next floor
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

missing
-li

p
w

n
Hydraulic lift: Trip to lowest floor
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

Return to normal operation when

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

car light power is on again.

w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
50/0 Accu power 24V power supply off. All other Emergency stop, , then error state.
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
errors are ignored in this state. Automatic return to normal
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

operation when power is on.

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

52/0 SL off Safety line open due to a fault. Error state “SL off”.
w

.u
li
w
.u

Automatic return to normal

.c

p-

w
w
w

operation when the safety circuit is

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

closed again.
w
p-

ft
w

52/1 SL off trip Safety line open due to a fault Emergency stop; then error state
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

while the lift was moving. “SL off”.

w
w
w

ft

Automatic return to normal w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

operation when the safety circuit is

w

ft
w
ift

li
w

closed again.
.u

.c

p-
w

52/2 SL door off Safety line of revolving shaft Waiting time of 4 seconds, then lift
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

door, car door or automatic controller opens the doors and

.c

p-

ft
w

shaft door is missing while the closes again.

ft

li
w
.u

.c

lift wants to start a trip.

li

p-
w
p-

ft

52/3 SL final limit Lift (probably) in final bottom Rope lift: Back to normal operation
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

limit switch. if limit switch is closed.

p-

ft
w
w

ft

The error message is

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

generated when the primary Hydraulic lift: If safety line is closed

w
p-

ft
n

.u

safety circuit is missing, while again lift goes to lowest floor and
li
w
.u

.c

p-

the lift is above top floor level stops operation.

w
w

ft

w
.u

or below bottom floor level (see

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

parameters "Top limit" and

w

li
w

"Bot.limit" in "General
.u

.c

p-
w
w

paramet.")
ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

99/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
Since the limit switch will be

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
monitored generally only

-li
w
.c

ft
w
through the safety circuit

p
ft

-li
w
.u
(normally no additional

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
separate contacts) the cause
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

of failure can also be at a

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
different contact within the

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

primary safety circuit.

p
w

ft
p

52/4 Final lim.insp.

.u
Safety circuit inspection limit Emergency stop; start in opposite

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
switch open. direction possible
w

p
w

w
f

52/5 Safety beam

.u
Safety light curtain is Emergency stop.

t.c
-li
w

p
w
interrupted during a trip. Safety beam will be resetted by
w

f
n

.u
-li
w pressing a new car call or the reset
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

button of the safety beam.

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

52/16 SL bypass monit. According to EN81-20 it is Only emergency operation and

w
w
w

allowed to bypass safety circuit inspection active.

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

of doors by a switch for service Error is only cleared if all

w

p
w

n
purposes. monitoring inputs are set if bypass
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
This switch must be monitored switch is activated.

w
w

f
n

by one or more feedback

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
inputs.

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
The error occurs if not all

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

monitoring inputs have the

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

same state.
t.c
-li

p
w

52/17 SL gear off Safety gear triggered (safety For monitoring an additional input
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

gear contact opened) "Safety line" - "Before gear" is

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

necessary.

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

Clearing this error is only possible

w

p
w

ft
w

by an reset input ("Safety line" -

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
"Gear reset")
w
w

ft

52/18 SL shaftdoor on Safety circuit shaft doors still w

Test according to EN81-20.
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

closed while doors are opened. Check safety circuit, check for
ft
w

li
w

bypass wire.
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

Back to normal mode by switching

w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

on inspection or recall operation for

.c

w
p-

ft
w

at least 5s or by resetting the lift

ift

li
w
.u

.c

controller.
p-
w
w

ft

52/19 SL doortest err. Error while testing saftety Check wiring: If doors are
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

circuit shaft doors according to completely opened the safety unit

p-

ft
w
ft

EN81-20 for door zone bypassing is

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

activated for a short time, so that

p-

ft

n
n

.u

safety circuit input SL4 will be

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

activated. If not this error message

w

ft

li
w
.u

is set.
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

Reason may be an error in wiring

n

.u
li
w
.u

or a defective safety unit.

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

If this error message occurs the

w
.u

.c
li
w

4th. time the lift goes out of

w
p-

ft
w

operation.
n

li
w
.u

.c

p-

Back to normal operation by lift

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

100/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
controller reset.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
52/20 SL rev.door on

-li
w Safety circuit revolving doors Test according to EN81-20.
.c

ft
w
still closed while they are Check safety circuit, check for

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
opened (monitored by second bypass wire.
-li

p
w

ft

n
contact to lift controller) Back to normal mode by switching
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

on inspection or recall operation for

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
at least 5s or by resetting the lift

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

controller.

p
w

ft
p

.u
52/21 Door ramp off Additional contact on door While starting: Door reopens up to

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
ramp lock is opened while the 4 times, then all calls are cleared;
w

p
w

w
f

.u
lift is moving or wants to start new trial if new call is set.

t.c
-li
w

p
w
Check ramp lock contact.
w

f
n

.u
-li
52/22 SL car door on w
.u

Safety circuit car doors still Test according to EN81-20.

t.c

w
w

p
w

closed while safety circuit shaft Check safety circuit, check for

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

doors is opened. bypass wire.

w
w
w

Back to normal mode by switching

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

on inspection or recall operation for

w

p
w

n
at least 5s or by resetting the lift
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
controller.

w
w

f
n

53/0 Battery defect

-li
w
Measured battery power below Lift goeas out of operation.
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
7V or by 3 consecutive After replacing the battery a

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
measurements (normally "Battery check" must be executed
-li
w
t.c

w
w

measured every 24 hours) or the lift must be resetted.

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

always below programmed limit

t.c
-li

p
w

(see parameter "Batt.[mV]" in

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

"Internal parameter")
t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

53/1 Battery warning Measured battery power below Battery may be defective or

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

programmed limit (see discharged.

w

p
w

ft
w

.u
parameter "Batt.[mV]" in Lift still in operation (see above).
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
"Internal parameter")
w
w

ft

w
.u

54/0 UPS error Error signal from UPS for Rope lift: Stop in next possible
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

emergency evacuation floor.

w

li
w

Hydraulic lift: Lift goes to lowest

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

floor.
ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

Re-levelling function still active.

.c

w
p-

ft
w

After deactivation of error signal

ift

li
w
.u

.c

return to normal operation.

p-
w
w

ft

54/1 UPS charge “Discharged” signal from UPS See UPS error above
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

for emergency evacuation

p-

ft
w
ft

PCB temp. ↑
li

66/0
w

PCB too hot Only for information

.u

.c
li

p-
w

Momentary only FVE 2.1 is

p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li

equipped with such sensor; here

w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

the input current is reduced

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c

automatically
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

67/0 Motor overtemp.1 Motor overtemperature (Input Rope lift: Stop in next possible
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

“Overtemp. 1“ activated). floor.

p-

w
w
w

ft

The operating temperature

w
.u

.c
li
w

depends on the characteristic Hydraulic lift: Lift goes to lowest

w
p-

ft
w

of the PTC thermistor. floor; Re-levelling function still

li
w
.u

.c

p-

active.
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

101/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
After cooling down (deactivation of

-li
w
.c

ft
w
the input) return to normal

p
ft

-li
w
.u
operation.

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
67/1 Motor overtemp.1 Motor overtemperature (Input See above
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

“Overtemp. 2“ activated).
.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
The operating temperature

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

depends on the characteristic

p
w

ft
p

.u
of the PTC thermistor.

-li
w
.u

t.c

Room temp. ↑

w
67/2 Machine room temperature is See above
w

p
w

w
f

.u
above limit (input

t.c
-li
w

p
w
"Roomtemp.max" activated).
w

f
n

.u
-li
67/3 Room temp. ↓ w
.u

Machine room temperature is See above

t.c

w
w

p
w

below limit (input

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

"Roomtemp.min" activated).

w
w
w

HSE-Temp.↓
p

f
67/4 HSE temperature too low See above
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

67/5 HSE-Temp.↑ HSE temperature too high See above

w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
67/16 Door1 overtemp. Door motor overtemperature Rope lift: Stop in next possible

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
67/17 Door2 overtemp.
w

floor.
p

f
n

-li
w
f

67/18 Door3 overtemp.

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
Hydraulic lift: Lift goes to lowest
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

floor.
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Re-levelling function still active.

w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
After cooling down (deactivation of

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

the input) return to normal

.u

.c
-li
w

p
operation.
w

ft
w

.u
li
w

80/1 Wrong code A module with an invalid Module with the invalid hardware
.u

.c

p-

w
w

hardware encoding (security code is ignored by the system

w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

code) is located on the CAN (see chapter "Hardware

w
p-

ft
w

bus. encoding").
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
96/0 SW error Error in the internal program Check EMC-compliant wiring of the
p-

w
w
w

ft

sequence of HSE, probably lift, replace HSE if necessary. w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
triggered by EMC interference
p-

ft
w
ift

or for example cold solder

li
w
.u

.c

p-

joints on the PCB.

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

97/0 Int.SW error Internal software error of a Emergency stop, re-initialization of

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft

or module, triggering the the module, then return to normal

w
ft

li
w

Lift WD-Reset
.u

"watchdog timer"; software operation.

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

restart. If this error occurs at a TSE or

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

See above. ESE-module, then the re-

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

initialization is done during

n

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

operation, ie, with no emergency

w
p-

ft

stop.
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

Check EMC-compliant wiring of the

w
w
w

ft

lift, replace PCB if necessary.

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

97/1 Lift Boot up Lift restart after power on Lift starts reset trip (if setup is
w

ft
w

li
w

already finished)
.u

.c

p-
w

97/2 Restart xxx Software restart of a module Emergency stop, re-initialization of

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

102/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
(xxx = PCB name) during operation (for example, the module, then return to normal

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
when you connect an ESE operation.

-li
w
.c

ft
w
module to a running lift). If this error occurs at a TSE or

p
ft

-li
w
.u
ESE-module, then the re-

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
initialization is done during
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

operation, ie, with no emergency

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
stop.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

97/3 ASE Softw.<1.40 Due to changes in the Lift is not running; HSE must be

p
w

ft
p

.u
CANopen standard, there are changed to older version or ASE to

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
compatibility issues when using version 1.40 or newer..
w

p
w

w
f

HSE modules with version from

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
1.32n and ASE modules older
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
than version 1.40 This error
.u

t.c

w
w

p
message also sometimes
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

occurs due to EMC problems -

w
w
w

see errors above.

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

97/4 FVE Softw.<1.40 See above Lift is not running; HSE must be
w

p
w

n
changed to older version or FVE to
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
version 1.40 or newer..

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
97/5 Lift SW-Reset Reset HSE was performed by

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
software (with keypad of HSE

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

or handheld terminal)
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

97/6 Lift HW-Reset Reset HSE was performed

t.c
-li

p
w

(with Reset button on HSE)

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

98/1 Group param. In a group of lifts the Start menu item „Group sync“
t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

parameters for shaft bus PCBs

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

ESE are not identical in all lifts.

w

p
w

ft
w

.u
98/2 Drive param. Only for lifts with drives To synchronize drive parameters
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
according to CANopen lift start menu item "Read from drive"
w
w

ft

w
.u

DSP417: The drive parameters in menu "Drive parameter“)

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

do not correspond to the

w

li
w

parameters stored in the lift

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

controller.
ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

128/xx SMS send error Error while sending an SMS, Check data transmission line and
.c

w
p-

ft
w

Fax send error fax or PC alarm message. receiver nummber / address.

ift

li
w
.u

PC send error
.c

p-
w
w

ft

CAN faulty Failure in the data transmission Depending on the CAN Error type:
n

.u

.c
li
w

129/16 CAN HW Overrun on the CAN bus (CANB = shaft Automatic repeated transmission
.c

p-

ft
w

129/17 CAN SW Overrun

ft

bus). of the disturbed CAN bus

li
w
.u

129/18 CANB HW Overrun

.c
li

p-

If this error occurs, the last message; no further error reaction.

w
p-

ft

129/19 CANB SW Overrun

n

CAN bus message is

n

.u

.c
li
w

129/20 CAN fault RXC

.u

.c

p-

automatically repeated, so that

w

ft
w

129/21 CAN HW Overr.1

w

ft

li
w

there is no data loss.

.u

129/22 CAN HW Overr.2

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

This error can, for example,

w

ft

129/23 CAN HW Overr.3

n

.u
li
w

129/24 CAN Overr.VT occur on the CAN bus when

.u

.c

p-

w
w

129/32 CAN fault Passiv switching on the main switch or

w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

when connecting new modules.

w
p-

ft
w

By increased number of such

n

li
w
.u

.c

errors check CAN bus

p-
w
w

ft

connection (see section

n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

103/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
„Troubleshooting at CAN bus

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
faults“).

-li
w
.c

ft
w
129/48 No connect xxx No reception of the "Heartbeat" Emergency stop.

p
ft

-li
w
.u
(xxx = PCB name)

.c
message of a module (xxx) by If the "heartbeat" of this module is
-li

p
w

ft

n
the HSE. received again, the system returns
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

All CAN-Bus units send a to normal operation.

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
"Heartbeat" message within a If this error occurs by a TSE or

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

specified time for supervising. ESE assembly, then there is no

p
w

ft
p

.u
emergency.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
129/49 No HSE conn. No reception of the "Heartbeat" Emergency stop.
w

p
w

w
f

.u
message of the HSE. Following an internal diagnostic

t.c
-li
w

p
w
and then return to normal
w

f
n

.u
-li
w operation.
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

If ESE or TSE modules do not

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

receive heartbeat of HSE for more

w
w
w

than 5 seconds they will switch off

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

all outputs and switch on "Out of

w

p
w

n
order" outputs.
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
129/50 Mand.ESE fault Any ESE marked as Finish last trip; then out of

w
w

f
n

"mandatory" is not available operation

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
(defective or data transmission

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
fault).

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

129/51 Mand.TSE fault Any TSE marked as Finish last trip; then out of
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

"mandatory" is not available operation

t.c
-li

p
w

(defective or data transmission

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

fault).
t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

129/64 CAN bus off Automatic shutdown of the Emergenca stop, thereafter, an

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

CAN bus due to many internal test of the data transfer

w

p
w

ft
w

.u
communication faults follows.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
If the data transfer is again without
w
w

ft

w
errors, then there is a return to
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

normal operation.
ft
w

li
w

At a CAN failure of a TSE or ESE-

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

assembly, the lift remains in

w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

operation; there will be no

.c

w
p-

ft
w

emergency stop.
ift

li
w
.u

.c

129/65 CANB bus off Automatic shutdown of the Lift keeps in operation; internal test
p-
w
w

ft

CAN bus B (shaft bus) due to of data transfer.

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

many communication faults

p-

ft
w
ft

129/81 ESE err.branch x

li

CAN bus errors on shaft bus, Check CAN bus (wiring,

w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

branch x. termination resistor, ...).

p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c

Possible reason may be switch

li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

off/on of a single lift inside a group.

w

ft

li
w
.u

129/82 Branch off

.c

Automatic shutdown of the See above

li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

CAN bus (branch x of the shaft

n

.u
li
w
.u

bus) due to many

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

communication faults.
w
.u

.c
li
w

129/83 Error local ESE CAN bus errors on shaft bus to See above
w
p-

ft
w

an ESE, plugged directly on the

li
w
.u

.c

p-

HSE.
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

104/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
129/96 No control bus Data transmission on the CAN Emergency stop , thereafter

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
bus (control bus) is not internal test of the data

-li
w
.c

ft
w
possible. transmission.

p
ft

-li
w
.u
Possible reasons: If the data transfer works again,

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
- No CAN bus cable connected then the system returns to normal
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

- No other bus module operation.

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
connected

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

- PCB defective

p
w

ft
p

129/97 CAN TX Overr.

.u
CAN transmit buffer overflow Emergency stop.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
on control bus Check signal connection to
w

p
w

w
f

Possible reasons: controller inputs.

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
- Bus load too high Contact lift controller manufacturer.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
- Frequently switching inputs
.u

t.c

w
w

p
- Errors in the controller
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

software

w
w
w

129/98 No shaft bus Data transmission on the CAN Lift continues operation.

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

bus B (shaft bus) is not Internal test of data transmission

w

p
w

n
possible.
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Possible reasons:

w
w

f
n

- No CAN bus cable connected

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
- No other bus module

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
connected

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

- PCB defective
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

129/99 CANB TX Overr. CAN transmit buffer overflow Lift continues operation.
t.c
-li

p
w

on shaft bus Check signal connection to

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

Possible reasons: controller inputs.

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

- Bus load too high Contact lift controller manufacturer.

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

- Frequently switching inputs

w

p
w

ft
w

- Errors in the controller

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

software

w
w
w

ft

129/100 No conn. to COP No CAN bus data transmission w

Lift continues operation.
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

to TSE boards inside car Internal test of data transmission

w

ft
w

li
w

operation panel COP.

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

Possible reasons:
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

- TSE defective
.c

w
p-

ft
w

- COP not connected

ift

li
w
.u

.c

- CAN bus line disturbed

p-
w
w

ft

129/128 Overrun RS232 Data overflow on RS232

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

interface (too much incoming

p-

ft
w
ft

data in short time)

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

129/129 Offl.Err.RS232 Disturbing signals on RS232 in

p-

ft

n
n

.u

offline mode
.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

129/130 Onl.Err.RS232 Disturbing signals on RS232 in

w

ft

li
w
.u

online mode
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

129/131 CRC error RS232 Invalid data received (wrong

n

.u
li
w
.u

checksum) on RS232
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

129/144 Overrun iModul Data overflow on iModul

w
.u

.c
li
w

(Modem, Ethernet, ...)

w
p-

ft
w

129/145 Offl.Err.iModul Disturbing signals on iModul

li
w
.u

.c

p-

(Modem, Ethernet, ...) in offline

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

105/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
mode

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
129/146 Onl.Err.iModul

-li
w Disturbing signals on iModul
.c

ft
w
(Modem, Ethernet, ...) in online

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
mode
-li

p
w

ft

n
129/147 CRC error iModul Invalid data received (wrong
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

checksum) on iModul

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
(Modem, Ethernet, ...)

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

130/48 Mult. group no. There are 2 HSE modules with The lift continues, however,

p
w

ft
p

.u
the same group number in a lift landing calls and group control do

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
group not work properly.
w

p
w

w
f

.u
144/1 Min.pressure For hydraulic lifts: oil pressure Emergency stop.

t.c
-li
w

p
w
below the limit (input Back to normal operation if input is
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

"Min.pressure" activated). deactivated again.

t.c

w
w

p
w

144/2 Max.pressure

n
For hydraulic lifts: oil pressure Emergency stop.

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

above the limit (input Back to normal operation if input is

w
w
w

f
"Max.pressure" activated). deactivated again.
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

144/16 Overload Lift overloaded Only measured if lift is located in a

w

p
w

n
f

floor with open doors.

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Back to normal operation if

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

overload input is off.

.u

t.c
-li

p
144/17 Max.load Maximum load limit reached Emergency stop. After the signal is
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

deactivated, lift moves tolowest

t.c

w
w

floor.

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Delete error by using load reset

w

p
w

button.
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

If there is no load reset button,

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

then automatic return to normal

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
operation.

p
w

ft
w

.u
160/0 Drive error Fault signal from the drive at Error state.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

standstill state. Back to normal operation if fault

w

ft

w
.u

signal is deactivated.
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

161/0 Drive err.move

w

Fault signal from the drive Emergency stop.

n

li
w
.u

while moving. Back to normal operation if fault

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

signal is deactivated. w
n

.u

.c
li
w

161/1 No Ready signal The "Ready" signal from the Emergency stop.
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

drive is not activated on time. Back to normal operation inside 2

li
w
.u

.c

p-

seconds.
w
w

ft

161/2 No Brake signal

n

The "Brake" signal from the Emergency stop.

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

drive is not activated on time. Back to normal operation inside 2

ft
w
ft

li
w

seconds.
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

161/3 Ready sign.n.off The "Ready" signal from the Emergency stop.
ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

drive is not deactivated on Back to normal operation inside 2

.u

.c

p-

ft
w

time. seconds.
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

161/4 Brake sig.n.off

p-

The "Brake" signal from the Emergency stop.

w
p-

ft

drive is not deactivated on Back to normal operation inside 2

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

time. seconds.
p-

w
w
w

ft

161/5 RB/contac. off

w

The feedback signal from Emergency stop.

.u

.c
li
w

running contactors is Back to normal operation inside 2

p-

ft
w

deactivated while the lift is

li

seconds.
w
.u

.c

p-
w

moving.
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

106/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
161/6 Brake=0 on move The "Brake" signal from the Emergency stop.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
drive is deactivated while the Back to normal operation inside 2

-li
w
.c

ft
w
lift is moving. seconds.

p
ft

-li
w
.u
161/7 Mov.=0 on run

.c
The "Moving" signal from the Emergency stop.
-li

p
w

ft

n
drive is deactivated while the Back to normal operation inside 2
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

lift is moving. seconds.

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
161/8 Softst=0 on run The "Ramp end" signal from Emergency stop.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

the softstarter (hydraulic lifts) is Back to normal operation inside 2

p
w

ft
p

.u
deactivated while the lift is seconds.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
moving.
w

p
w

w
f

.u
161/9 No Softst.signal The "Ramp end" signal from Emergency stop.

t.c
-li
w

p
w
the softstarter (hydraulic lifts) is Back to normal operation inside 2
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

not activated in time. seconds.

t.c

w
w

p
w

161/10 RB/contact.on The feedback signal from the Back to normal operation if the

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

running contactors is not signal is deactivated.

w
w
w

f
deactivated after the trip is
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

finished.
w

p
w

n
f

161/11 Brakesig.not off The "Brake" signal from the Back to normal operation if the
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
drive is activated while the lift is signal is deactivated.

w
w

f
n

-li
in standstill state. w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
161/12 Softst.not off

p
The "Ramp end" signal from Back to normal operation if the
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

the softstarter (hydraulic lifts) is signal is deactivated.

t.c

w
w

activated while the lift is in

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

standstill state.
w

p
w

161/13 CAN:TimeoutBrake Only by drives according to Emergency stop.

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

CANopen lift DSP417: Back to normal operation inside 2

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

No message to open the brake seconds.

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
in time.

p
w

ft
w

.u
161/14 CAN:Timeout VoEn Only by drives according to Emergency stop.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

CANopen lift DSP417: Back to normal operation inside 2

w

ft

w
.u

No message to apply power to seconds.

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

the motor ("Voltage Enable") in

w

li
w
.u

time.
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

161/15 CAN:TimeoutReady
n

Only by drives according to Emergency stop. w

n

.u

.c
li
w

CANopen lift DSP417: Back to normal operation inside 2

.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

No CAN message "Ready=1" seconds.

n

li
w
.u

.c

p-

("Ready to switch on") in time.

w
w

ft

161/16 CAN:Timeout Br=0 Only by drives according to Emergency stop.

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

CANopen lift DSP417: Back to normal operation inside 2

w

ft
w
ft

li
w

No message to close the brake seconds.

.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

("Speed zero") in time.

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

161/17 CAN:TimeoutRdy=0 Only by drives according to Emergency stop.

.u

.c

p-

ft
w

CANopen lift DSP417: Back to normal operation inside 2

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

No CAN message "Ready=0" seconds.

p-
w
p-

ft

("Operation disabled") in time.

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

161/18 RDY signal off The "RDY" signal from the Emergency stop.
p-

w
w
w

ft

drive is deactivated while the Back to normal operation inside 2

w
.u

.c
li
w

lift is moving. seconds.

p-

ft
w

161/19 RDY signal on The "RDY" signal from the Back to normal operation if the
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

drive is activated while the lift is signal is deactivated.

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

107/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
in standstill state.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
161/20 RDY signal n.ff

-li
w The "RDY" signal from the Emergency stop.
.c

ft
w
drive is not activated in time. Back to normal operation inside 2

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
seconds.
-li

p
w

ft

n
161/21 CAN:TimeoutOpDis Only by drives according to Emergency stop.
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

CANopen lift DSP417: Back to normal operation inside 2

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
No CAN message to stop seconds.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

oparation ("Operation

p
w

ft
p

.u
disabled") in time.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
161/22 CAN:TimeoutOpEn Only by drives according to Emergency stop.
w

p
w

w
f

.u
CANopen lift DSP417: Back to normal operation inside 2

t.c
-li
w

p
w
No CAN message to start seconds.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

moving ("Operation enabled")

t.c

w
w

p
w

in time.

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

161/23 CAN:Timeout Move Only by drives according to Emergency stop.

w
w
w

f
CANopen lift DSP417: Back to normal operation inside 2
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

No CAN message that lift seconds.

w

p
w

n
started moving ("No speed
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
zero") in time.

w
w

f
n

-li
161/24 CAN:Timeout Targ Only by drives according to w Emergency stop.
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
CANopen lift DSP417: Back to normal operation inside 2

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

No acknowledge CAN seconds.

t.c

w
w

message for new target in time

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c

(only in "Position mode")

-li

p
w

161/32 Drive standby No return from standby mode Perform drive reset (voltage off/on)
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

162/0 Contactor not on Running contactors are not Emergency stop.

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

switched on while starting a trip Back to normal operation inside 2

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
or suddently switched off while seconds.

p
w

ft
w

.u
moving.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
162/1 Contact. not off
w

Running contactors are not Back to normal operation if all

w

ft

w
.u

switched off on trip end. running contactors are switched

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

off.
w

li
w
.u

163/0 Brake not opened Brakes are not opened while Emergency stop.
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

163/64 Brake1 not opend

ft

starting a trip or suddently Back to normal operation inside 2 w

n

.u

.c
li
w

... ... switched off while moving. seconds.

.c

w
p-

ft
w

163/71 Brake8 not opend

ift

li
w
.u

163/1 Brake not closed Brakes are not closed on trip Back to normal operation if all
.c

p-
w
w

163/80 Brake1 not closd

ft

end. brakes are closed.

n

.u

.c
li
w

... ...
.c

p-

ft
w

163/87 Brake8 not closd

ft

li
w
.u

163/2 Brake monitoring Wear limit of brakes reached. Stop in next floor, then out of
.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

operation.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

163/3 Governor not on The coil on the overspeed Emergency stop.

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

governor is not switched on (if Back to normal operation inside 2

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

overspeed governors is used seconds.

w
p-

ft

for uncontrolled movement

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

prevention)
w
w
w

ft

163/4 Governor not off The coil on the overspeed Back to normal operation if coil on
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

governor is not switched off on

w

overspeed governor is switched

ft
w

li
w

trip end (if overspeed off.

.u

.c

p-
w

governors is used for

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

108/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
uncontrolled movement

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
prevention).

-li
w
.c

ft
w
163/5 Valves not open Safety valves (UCM - A3) do Emergency stop.

p
ft

-li
w
↓Valve1 not open

.u
163/7

.c
not open in time Back to normal operation inside 2
-li

p
w
163/9 ↓Valve2 not open

ft

n
seconds.
p

.u

.c
-li
163/34 w
↑Valve not open
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
163/6 Valve not closed Safety valves (UCM - A3) do Back to normal operation if valves

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

163/8 not close in time at trip end are closed.

p
w

ft
p

163/10
n

.u
-li
w
.u

Βrake opened while lift is in

t.c

163/11 Brake opened Check brake and brake contacts.

w
w

p
w

n
Error message is also displayed if

w
standstill state.
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
brake is opened manually for

p
w
w

f
n

.u
example for emergency

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
evacuation).

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
163/12 Valve opened Safety valves (UCM - A3) open Check valve and valve contacts.

t.c
-li
w

w
↓Valve1 opened

w
163/13
w

while the lift is in standstill state Error message is also displayed if

p

f
n

-li
163/14 ↓Valve2 opened w
.u

valve is opened manually.

t.c

w
163/35

p
↑Valve opened
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

163/15 Em.Valve not op. Emergency down valve Check valve and valve contacts.
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

("iValve") not opened in time

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

while starting a trip

w

p
w

n
up

163/16 Em.Valve not cl.

n

Emergency down valve See above

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
("iValve") not closed in time at
w

f
n

-li
w
f

trip end.
.u

t.c
-li

p
163/17 Brake 1 defect
w

Lift did move more than Out of operation

p

f
n

.u
-li
w

163/18 Brake 2 defect programmed limit while Reset necessary to go back to

.u

t.c

t.
w
w

163/19 Brake 3 defect

p

automatic brake check was normal operation

w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

163/20 Brake 4 defect

.c
-li
w

carried out
w

p
163/21 Brake 5 defect
w

ft
w

.u
163/22 Brake 6 defect
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
163/23 Brake 7 defect
w
w

ft

163/24 Brake 8 defect w

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

163/25 A3 valve defect Lift did move more than Out of operation
w

ft
w

163/26 Dn.valve defect

li
w

programmed limit while Reset necessary to go back to

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

automatic valve check was normal operation

w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

carried out
.c

w
p-

ft
w

163/32 SC off Braketest Safety line open while brake Perform brake test manually (Menu
ift

li
w
.u

.c

test was active; Brake test „Technical check“ – „Mechanical

p-
w
w

ft

canceled Brake“ – „Brake standstill“)

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

163/33 SC off Valvetest Safety line open while valve Perform valve test manually (Menu
p-

ft
w
ft

test was active; Valve test „Technical check“ – „A3/Down

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

canceled valve“)
p-

ft

n
n

.u

163/48 Relaistestfehler
.c

When using a safety module Manually test the output relays via
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

PSU (e.g. Limax33CP), the hardware test.

w

ft

li
w
.u

output relays are tested Replace Limax33CP error still

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

cyclically exists.
n

.u
li
w
.u

164/xx Error messages for VVVF of Emergency stop.

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

manufacturer "Lust" controlled After standstill the lift controller

w
.u

.c
li
w

by CAN bus. sends an error reset message

w
p-

ft
w

Please check operating manual every 2 seconds to the VVVF.

li
w
.u

.c

p-

of inverter for error diagnosis. once the VVVF cleared the error
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

109/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
message to lift controller goes

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
back to normal operation.

-li
w
.c

ft
w
176/1 VO in doorzone The upper prelimit switch VO Emergency stop.

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
switches within the door zone Back to normal operation if all
-li

p
w

ft

n
(incorrect shift position). position switches have the right
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

One possible cause is that one state again (see switching

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
of the door zone switch has not sequence diagram in lift

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

switched off. schematic).

p
w

ft
p

.u
176/2 VU in doorzone The lower prelimit switch VU See above

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
switches within the door zone
w

p
w

w
f

.u
(incorrect shift position).

t.c
-li
w

p
w
One possible cause is that one
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
of the door zone switch has not
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

switched off.

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

176/3 Error VO/VU The switching state of at least Emergency stop.

w
w
w

one of the prelimit switches VO Back to normal operation if all

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

or VU is wrong (for example position switches have the right

w

p
w

n
both switches on or lift in state again (see switching
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
lowest floor, but VU is not on). sequence diagram in lift

w
w

f
n

This error message may also schematic).

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
occur if the door zone switches

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
SGO/SGU are not working

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

well; so the lift controller may

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

have miscount the floor

t.c
-li

p
w

number.
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

176/4 SGM off in level According to the measurement Emergency stop.

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

of the positioning system the lift Back to normal operation if all

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

is located inside door zone, but position switches have the right
w

p
w

ft
w

the door zone switch SGM is state again (see switching

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
off. sequence diagram in lift
w
w

ft

Possible reasons: w
schematic) and the positioning
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

- switch SGM defective system is counting well again.

w

ft
w

li
w

- Positioning system defective, Mainly a reset is necessary.

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

for example incremental If the motor encoder is used as

w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

encoder not connected well). positioning system this error also

.c

w
p-

ft
w

may occur during technical test. In

ift

li
w
.u

.c

this case a reset has to be

p-
w
w

ft

performed.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

176/5 SGM on,doorz.off According to the measurement See above

p-

ft
w
ft

of the positioning system the lift

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

is located outside door zone,

p-

ft

n
n

.u

but the door zone switch SGM

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft

is on.
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

Possible reasons: see above.

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

176/6 KH5 not on The feedback signal from the Emergency stop.
n

.u
li
w
.u

safety circuit for moving with Back to normal operation if

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

(if using MCU:

n

open doors was not activated feedback signal is switched on

w
.u

.c
li
w

Zon. not on) while the lift was entering the again.
w
p-

ft
w

door zone. Check safety relais on HSE (KH5,

n

li
w
.u

.c

p-

KH6, KH7) and poitioning system /

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

110/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
doorzone switch).

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
176/7 KH5 not off

-li
w The feedback signal from the See above
.c

ft
w
safety circuit for moving with

p
ft

-li
w
.u
(if using MCU:

.c
open doors was not
-li

p
w

ft

n
Zon. not off) deactivated while the lift was
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

leaving the door zone.

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
176/8 Premature stop Lift stops before reaching the Lift starts re-levelling

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

level zone.

p
w

ft
p

.u
Possible reason:

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
- Teach-in not done accurately
w

p
w

w
f

.u
- Level zone too small

t.c
-li
w

p
w
- Setting of drive (VVVF) not
w

f
n

.u
-li
correct w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

- drive parameters inside lift

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

controller (delay times, ..) are

w
w
w

not set correctly.

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

176/9 Late stop Lift has stopped behind the Lift starts re-levelling
w

p
w

n
level position.
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
Possible reasons: see above

w
w

f
n

176/10 Relev.too short

-li
w
Lift starts re-levelling, but is still Lift starts re-levelling again (up to 6
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
outside the levelling zone when times)

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
stopping.
-li
w
t.c

w
w

Possible reasons: see above.

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

This error also occurs if the

t.c
-li

p
w

safety relays for moving with

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

open doors (KH5, KH6, KH7)

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

not in right switching position

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

after power on. In this case

w

p
w

ft
w

send the lift to another floor

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
once.
w
w

ft

176/11 Relev.too long Lift stops too late while re- w

Lift starts re-levelling again (up to 6
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

levelling and leaves the level times)

ft
w

li
w

zone again on the other side.

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

Possible reasons: see above.

w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

176/12 Relev.overspeed While re-levelling the lift Emergency stop.

ift

li
w
.u

.c

exceeds the maximum Back to normal operation inside 2

p-
w
w

ft

permitted speed seconds.

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

(Parameter „v Relev“) Check setting of parameter "v

p-

ft
w
ft

Relev"; if possible increase

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

parameter
p-

ft

n
n

.u

176/13 Overspeed
.c

The lift exceeds the maximum Emergency stop.

li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

permitted speed Back to normal operation inside 2

w

ft

li
w
.u

(Parameter „v Nominal“) by at seconds.

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

least 20%. Check setting of parameter "v

n

.u
li
w
.u

nominal"
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

176/14 Wrong direction The positioning system detects Emergency stop.

w
.u

.c
li
w

a different direction of Back to normal operation inside 2

w
p-

ft
w

movement than the selected seconds.

li
w
.u

.c

p-

direction.
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

111/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
Possible reasons:

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
- Positioning system defectice

-li
w
.c

ft
w
- Direction signals to drive not

p
ft

-li
w
.u
connected well or defective

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
- wrong drive setting
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

- motor cable wrong connected

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
- Field direction of power

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

supply wrong (change 2

p
w

ft
p

phases)

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
176/15 Lift fast on VO If moving upwards the upper Lift is slowing down to arrival
w

p
w

w
f

prelimit switch VO was speed v0 if the prelimit switch goes

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
switched on while the lift was on.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
still running with v3 (position of Check and correct position of
.u

t.c

w
w

p
VO wrong). prelimit switch VO.
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

In general, the lift controller If incremental or absolute encoder

w
w
w

must slow down the lift before (AWG) is used as positioning

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

VO switches on. Only by lifts system: check parameter "Dec. v3

w

p
w

n
with just 2 floors the prelimit ↑" and place the prelimit switch by
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
switches may be used as about 90% of this value before

w
w

f
n

slowdown switches. highest level.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
176/16 Lift fast on VU If moving downwards the lower Lift is slowing down to arrival

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
prelimit switch VU was speed v0 if the prelimit switch goes
-li
w
t.c

w
w

switched on while the lift was on.

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

still running with v3 (position of Check and correct position of

t.c
-li

p
w

VU wrong). prelimit switch VU.

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

In general, the lift controller If incremental or absolute encoder

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

must slow down the lift before (AWG) is used as positioning

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

VU switches on. Only by lifts system: check parameter "Dec. v3

w

p
w

ft
w

↓" and place the prelimit switch by

n

with just 2 floors the prelimit

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
switches may be used as about 90% of this value before
w
w

ft

slowdown switches. w
.u

lowest level.
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

176/17 Magnet wrong Only for positioning system via Stop in next floor.
w

li
w
.u

"Switch": Switching sequence Back to normal operation if all

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

of the position switches (door position switches have the right

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

zone switches, slow down state again (see switching

.c

w
p-

ft
w

switch) wrong. sequence diagram in lift

ift

li
w
.u

.c

schematic).
p-
w
w

ft

Check all position switches.

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

176/18 SGV in doorzone

p-

Slow down switch SGV Stop in next floor.

w

ft
w
ft

li
w

switched inside door zone Back to normal operation if all

.u

.c
li

p-
w

(wrong position, see switching position switches have the right

p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c

sequence in lift schematic). state again (see switching

li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

A possible reason is also, that sequence diagram in lift

w

ft

li
w
.u

one of the door zone switches schematic).

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

did not switch off. Check all position switches.

n

.u
li
w
.u

176/19 SGE in doorzone Reference switch SGE Stop in next floor.

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

switched inside door zone Back to normal operation if all

w
.u

.c
li
w

(wrong position, see switching position switches have the right

w
p-

ft
w

sequence in lift schematic). state again (see switching

li
w
.u

.c

p-

A possible reason is also, that sequence diagram in lift

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

112/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
one of the door zone switches schematic).

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
did not switch off. Check all position switches.

-li
w
.c

ft
w
176/20 Error SGE State of reference switch SGE Stop in next floor.

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
wrong. Back to normal operation if all
-li

p
w

ft

n
(wrong position, see switching position switches have the right
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

sequence in lift schematic). state again (see switching

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
A possible reason is also, that sequence diagram in lift

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

one of the door zone switches schematic).

p
w

ft
p

.u
did not switch off. Check all position switches.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
176/21 Slick error For lifts with slip monitoring: Emergency stop, than out of
w

p
w

w
f

.u
slip too large operation

t.c
-li
w

p
w
176/22 AWG2 CAN fault CAN bus connection to 2. AWG Emergency stop
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

disturbed Back to normal operation if CAN

t.c

w
w

p
w

bus connection works again

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

176/23 AWG2 error Fault signal from control unit Stop in next floor, than out of

w
w
w

f
(UEA) if using double AWG operation
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

176/24 Shelter top open Shelter monitoring in shaft Only moving with inspection /
w

p
w

n
f

head triggered emergency recall operation

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
possible; otherwise emergency

w
w

f
n

-li
w stop
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
176/25 Shelter bot.open

p
Shelter monitoring in shaft pit See above
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

triggered
t.c

w
w

176/26 Bearer top off

p

Input signal from automatic Emergency stop, than out of order.

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

bearer in shaft head not Back to normal operation if input is

w

p
w

switched on while control switched on

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

output for bearer is set.

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

176/27 Bearer top on Input signal from automatic Emergency stop, than out of order.

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
bearer in shaft head still Back to normal operation if input is

p
w

ft
w

.u
switched on while control switched off
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

output for bearer is off.

w

ft

w
.u

176/28 Bearer bot.off Input signal from automatic See above

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

bearer in shaft pit not switched

n

li
w
.u

on while control output for

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

bearer is set. w
n

.u

.c
li
w

176/29 Bearer bot.on Input signal from automatic See above

.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

bearer in shaft pit still switched

li
w
.u

.c

p-

on while control output for

w
w

ft

bearer is off.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

176/30 Shelter open

w

Shelter monitoring triggered Only moving with inspection /

ft
w
ft

li
w

emergency recall operation

.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

possible; otherwise emergency

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

stop
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

176/31 Apron off Apron is pulled out even if it Emergency stop, than out of order.
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

should be pulled in (depending Back to normal operation if apron

p-
w
p-

ft

on actual lift position and type has right state again.

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

of apron)
p-

w
w
w

ft

176/32 Apron not off Apron is not pulled out even if it Emergency stop, than out of order.
w
.u

.c
li
w

should be (depending on actual Back to normal operation if apron

p-

ft
w

lift position and type of apron) has right state again.

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

176/48 Interm.door Intermediate door opened while No further reaction.

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

113/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
lift was moving Only for information or for better

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
fault analysis if contact of

-li
w
.c

ft
w
intermediate door is also

p
ft

-li
w
.u
connected inside safety circuit.

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
If intermediate door is open lift may
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

only be used in special operation

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
(special key function)

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

176/64 Pos.difference When door zone switch SGM Emergency stop, than out of

p
w

ft
p

.u
was switched on the currently operation.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
measured position differs Check positioning encoder
w

p
w

w
f

significantly (parameter "Max. (function, mechanical fixing!), if

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
Diff. SGM) from the stored necessary do new teach-in.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
position measured during If motor encoder is used for
.u

t.c

w
w

p
teach-in. positining this error may occur
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

during technical check. In this case

w
w
w

reset the lift controller (power off)

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

176/80 Bolts not out Time-out while pulling out the After the configurable number of
w

p
w

n
holding bolts. trials the lift moves to lowest floor
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
and goes out of operation.

w
w

f
n

176/81 Bolts not in Time-out while pulling in the After the configurable number of

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
holding bolts. trials the lift lowers back to holding

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
position and goes out of operation.

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

176/82 Bolt out on trip Holding bolt are suddently not Emergency stop. Than the lift
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

complete pulled in anymore cntroller tries to pull in the holding

t.c
-li

p
w

while the lift is moving bolts. If possible back to normal

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

operation.
t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

176/83 Bolt error Not possible to move the Out of operation

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

holding bolts.
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
176/84 Re-pump error Lift is in holding position; re- Stop re-pumping; out of operation
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
pumping started by signal "Low
w
w

ft

w
.u

pressure": Even if the lift has

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

reached the max. position for

w

li
w

re-pumping (parameter "Pump

.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

off[mm]") the signal "Low

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

pressure" is still on.

.c

w
p-

ft
w

176/85 Reached signal Even if lift has moved up from Stop operation
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-

the holding positioning and If "Holded signal is switched off

w
w

ft

pulled in the holding bolts the back to normal operation

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

feedback signal "Holded" is not

p-

ft
w
ft

li

off.
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

176/86 No reached sign. Even if lift is already below Stop operation

p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li

holding position (Parameter If "Holded signal is switched on

w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

„Hold.zone[mm]“) the signal back to normal operation.

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c

"Holded" is not switched on.

li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

176/87 Hold.trip error 5 not succesfull attemps to put Out of operation

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

lift to holding device or move

p-

w
w
w

ft

back from holding device.

w
.u

.c
li
w

176/88 Diving error 10 not succesfull attemps to Out of operation

w
p-

ft
w

move the lift back to next level

li
w
.u

.c

p-

("Diving", for example after an

w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

114/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
error or after inspection trip).

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
176/89 Insp.overspeed

-li
w Overspeed in inspection mode Emergency stop.
.c

ft
w
Back to normal operation inside 2

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
seconds.
-li

p
w

ft

n
176/112 OP device err. Faulty condition of the OP Back to normal operation if OP
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

device (e.g. set both limit device has defined state again.

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
switches)

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

176/113 OP device ramp OP-device is unlocked while See above

p
w

ft
p

.u
the lift wants to start

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
176/114 OP dev. not out OP device can't move out See above
w

p
w

w
f

.u
176/115 OP dev. not in OP device can't move in See above

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

176/116 OP dev. ramp on Ramp of OP device can't move See above

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

out
t.c

w
w

p
w

n
176/117 OP dev. ramp off Ramp of OP device can't move See above

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

in

w
w
w

f
n

176/120 Pallet hook err. Timeout while pullin/push out Back to normal operation if pallet

-li
w
.u

t.c

pallet hook is in one of the end positions

w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
176/121 Pallet limit Pallet final limit switch activated
Back to normal operation if final

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
limit switch is deactivated.
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

176/128 Uncontr.movement Lift moved out of the door zone Out of operation.
t.c
-li

p
w

while the doors are open Back to normal operation only by

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

(see EN81 Annex A3) operationg a special Reset switch

t.c

w
w

f
or by switching on emergency
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

recall operation.
w

p
w
p

176/129 Input unc.move Lift controller has recognized Out of operation.

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
uncontrolled movement, but the Back to normal operation only by

w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
input to check the uncontrolled operationg a special Reset switch
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
movement state has not or by switching on emergency

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w

switched on. recall operation.

.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c

176/131 No deceleration
li
w

Lifts with slow down control Emergency stop

w
p-

ft
w

circuit: Lift didn't slow down to Back to normal operation after a

n

li
w
.u

.c

defined speed at the final floors few seconds.

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

176/132 Dec.circ.not off Lifts with slow down control Back to normal operation if control w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
circuit: Control circuit still circuit has right state again
p-

ft
w
ift

triggered at standstill
li
w
.u

.c

p-

176/133 Dec.circ.fault
w

Reset of deceleration circuit not Check deceleration circuit, check

w

ft

n
n

.u

possible deceleration circuit reset (see

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft

output function „Safety space“ –

w
ft

li
w
.u

„Decel.reset“)
.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

176/134 Dec.bypass
n

Feedback signal from Check bypass relay, check

n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

deceleration circuit bypass feedback input.

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

relays has wrong state.

n

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

192/1 Trip time out Time between 2 state changes Emergency stop, out of operation
w
p-

ft

of shaft switches SGM (door

n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

zone) exceeded (Trip time

w
w
w

ft

monitoring according to EN81;

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

parameter "Triptime[s]").
w

ft
w

li
w

192/2 LS or callmisuse Number of trips on car calls, in All car calls cleared; no further
.u

.c

p-
w

which the light screen has not error reaction

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

115/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
been interrupted, exceeded

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
(parameter „Check LS“).

-li
w
.c

ft
w
Possible reason:

p
ft

-li
w
.u
- car call misuse by pressing all

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
car call buttons
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

- Light screen not working

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
192/3 Alarm call Emergency call button was No further error reaction

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

pressed.

p
w

ft
p

.u
The emergency call is only

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
displayed in the fault memory,
w

p
w

w
f

if an input of HSE (normally

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
input 14, since it is already
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
connected to the HSE with the
.u

t.c

w
w

p
emergency line) has been
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

parameterized as "Alarm call".

w
w
w

192/4 Trip time stop Trip time exceeded even Emergency stop

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

though the lift is already on Back to normal operation after 2

w

p
w

n
braking / stopping sec.
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
192/5 Slack rope Slack rope monitoring by load Emergency stop. After the signal is

w
w

f
n

measurement device deactivated, lift moves tolowest

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
floor.

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u
Delete error by using load reset

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

button.
p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

If there is no load reset button,

t.c
-li

p
w

then automatic return to normal

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

operation.
t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

Check ropes and load

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

measurement device.
w

p
w

ft
w

192/6 Rope difference

n

Too large difference between Emergency stop. After the signal is

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
rope loads deactivated, lift moves tolowest
w
w

ft

floor. w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

Delete error by using load reset

w

ft
w

li
w

button.
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

If there is no load reset button,

w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

then automatic return to normal

.c

w
p-

ft
w

operation.
ift

li
w
.u

.c

Check ropes and load

p-
w
w

ft

measurement device.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

192/7 Surfing Signal from external anti- Energency stop

p-

ft
w
ft

surfing device
li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

241/1 Door x close err. Timeout while door is closing Check door motor / door controller
p-

ft

n
n

.u

242/1 Check setting of parameter

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

243/1
w

ft
w

"Closetime [s]"
w

ft

li
w
.u

Lift controller starts closing several

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

times (parameter "Close attemps"),

n

.u
li
w
.u

than all calls are cleared.

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

New close attemps if new call is

w
.u

.c
li
w

pressed.
w
p-

ft
w

241/2 Door x open error

n

Timeout while door is opening Check door motor / door controller

li
w
.u

.c

242/2
p-

Check setting of parameter

w
w

ft

243/2
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

116/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
"Opentime [s]"

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
Lift controller starts opening

-li
w
.c

ft
w
several times (parameter "Open

p
ft

-li
w
.u
attemps"), than all calls are cleared

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
and lift out of operation.
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

New open attemps if new call is

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
pressed.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

241/3 Door x reop.error Timeout while door is closing See above

p
w

ft
p

242/3
n

.u
after reopening by light screen

-li
w
.u

t.c

243/3

w
w

p
w

n
241/4 Door x opn.switch Dooropen-limit-switch of a door Lift controller retries to open / close

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

242/4

w
is suddenly deactivated without the doors by a new call

p
w
w

f
243/4
n

.u
door command.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
241/5 Door x cls.switch
w
Doorclose-limit-switch of a door Lift controller retries to open / close

p
w

w
f
cn

242/5

.u
is suddenly deactivated without the doors by a new call

t.c
-li
w

w
243/5

w
door command.
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

241/6 SL Door x shorted Safety circuit of car door Out of operation (dangerous state).
t.c

p
w

242/6

n
shorted Check safety switch and wiring
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

243/6 If the door has no limit switches

t.c

w
w
w

f
the reason for this error may be
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

a defective door controller /

w

p
w

n
up

door motor
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

241/7 Door x nudging

w
Forced door closing initiated by If possible, lift closes the door with
w

f
n

242/7

-li
w
f

a permanently interrupted light reduced force. If available the

.u

t.c
-li

w
243/7

p
screen (only if parameter buzzer signal is switched on while
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

"Nudging" is set) door is closing

.u

t.c

t.
w
w

241/8 Door x light scr. Light screen permanently If nudging is enabled (see above)
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c

242/8
-li
w

interrupted (parameter “Max. forced door closing

w

p
w

ft

243/8
w

LS [s]“)
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

241/9 Door x rev. input Door reverse input (mechanical Back to normal operation if reverse
p-

w
w
w

ft

242/9 blocking signal) permanently input is off. w

.u

.c
li
w

243/9
w
interrupted
p-

ft
w

241/10 Door x wrong fl. Only for electrical operated Out of operation
li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
242/10
w

shaft doors with limit switches: Back to normal operation if this

w

ft

243/10 w
n

.u

Door open limit switch is shaft door is closed again

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

operated in other floor (maybe

ift

li
w
.u

shaft door in any other than the

.c

p-
w
w

ft

actual floor is open)

n

.u

.c
li
w

241/11 Door x Error LS Error signal from light screen Lift still in operation, door nudging
.c

p-

ft
w

242/11
ft

(if enabled)
li
w
.u

.c
li

243/11
p-
w
p-

ft

241/12 Error LSx test Error while testing the light If this test fails some timest he lift
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

242/12
.c

screen with a test signal (see stops operation.

p-

ft
w
w

243/12
ft

output functions).
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

The test signal is set by the lift Note: The light screen must be
w
p-

ft
n

.u

controller if the lift reaches the equipped with such a test input.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

door zone of the target floor.

w
w

ft

w
.u

The light screen must than

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

indicate an interruption – if not

w

li
w
.u

this error message is set.

.c

p-
w
w

241/13 Door3 blocking

ft

Door reverse input (mechanical Door remains open until new call is
n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

117/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
Nr. Error message Description Lift controller reaction

-li
w
.u

.c

w
242/13 blocking) was activated some pressed.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
243/13

.c
times while door was closing

-li
w
.c

ft
w
(see parameter „Max.reverse“)

p
ft

-li
w
.u
255/0 Device specific

.c
Error message from CANopen Check error stack of device, see
-li

p
w

ft

n
lift device of other manufacturer manual of device
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Exxx
.c

Error code of an external CAN See operation manual of this

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
open module (e.g. VVVF device

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Zetadyn with CANopen

p
w

ft
p

.u
connection)

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Unknown err. An error code has been sent by See operation manual of this
w

p
w

w
f

.u
an external CAN open module, device

t.c
-li
w

p
w
which is not yet described
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

inside the lift controller.

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

118/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
4.17 Error messages during teach-in procedure

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

Error: Lift During teach-in the lift could not reach the top floor.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

did Possible causes:

p
w

ft

n
p

not go to top - Faulty door zone switch SGM or switching points for SGM set
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

floor! incorrectl

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
- Lower prelimit switch VU has not switched off

.u

.c
-li
w

p
- Upper prelimit switch VO has not switched on

ft
p

.u
-li
Door error w
Door closing error when starting the teach-in trip
.u

t.c

w
w

p
Lift not in Lift not located on the bottom floor when starting teach-in procedure.
w

w
f

.u

t.c
bottom floor
-li
w

The shaft switches must have the following states when starting

p
w
w

teach-in procedure (complete calibration or calibration shaft switches):

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

- door zone switch SGM switched on

w
w

p
w

n
- upper prelimit switch VO switched off and lower prelimit switch VU

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
switched on (if available) or reference switch SGE off (if available)

w
w

f
n

- SGO and SGU (if available) switched on

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Teach in not Tech-in not possible because actual lift state is not "Setup" (e.g.

p
w

n
f
n

.u
possible, check Inspection, Emergency recall operation, error state).

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
lift state!

w
w

f
n

-li
Time exceeded w
Exceeded time between 2 status changes of SGM, SGO or SGU
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
during teach-in (see parameters "triptime[s]").

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

State changed. Lift state changed during teach-in (e.g. error state or emergency recall
t.c

w
w

New state: operation switched on)

p

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

Xxxx
t.c
-li

p
Floorcount error
w

The door zone switch SGM has switched too often during the teach-in
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

Check SGM procedure (e.g. due to bouncing of the switch).

.u

t.c

t.
w
w

VO switched
w

Upper prelimit switch VO switched while the lift was inside the door

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

in doorzone zone. Check switching point.

w

p
w

ft
w

VU switched Lower prelimit switch VU switched while the lift was inside the door
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

in doorzone
p-

zone. Check switching point.

w
w
w

ft

SGE switched Reference switch SGE switched while the lift was inside the door w
.u

.c
li
w

w
in doorzone
p-

zone. Check switching point.

w

ft
w

li
w

Error on SGO Upper door zone switch SGO not working during teach-in.
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

Error on SGU Lower door zone switch SGU not working during teach-in.
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

Position of SGO Error in switching sequence SGO (SGO switched at undefined or at

.c

w
p-

ft
w

wrong! wrong position). Possibly SGO and SGU are reversed.

ift

li
w
.u

.c

Position of SGU Error in switching sequence SGU (SGU switched at undefined or at

p-
w
w

ft

wrong! wrong position). Possibly SGO and SGU are reversed.

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

Count direction Counting direction of the position encoder incorrectly. The two
p-

ft
w
ft

wrong! channels of the encoder must be changed.

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w

Setup position The teach-in of the braking distance was started before teach-in of the
p-

ft

n
n

.u

switch not done!

.c

floor positions (magnetic switches) was finished.

li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

Encoder is not No signals from encoder during teach-in trip.

w

ft

li
w
.u

counting
.c

Check encoder and wiring!

li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

Encoder error Irregular encoder signals during teach-in trip. Check encoder and
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

wiring!
p-

w
w
w

ft

Door zone too In normal case, the door zone (SGM or parameter "Vane length" if
w
.u

.c
li
w

small for stop

w

using absolute encoder) should be adjusted so that the point where all
p-

ft
w

distances!
n

spped signals will be switched off is located inside door zone. The
li
w
.u

.c

Check settings!
p-

teach-in trip has however measured that this is not the case in at least
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

119/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
1 floor. Therefore, either (if possible) change settings on the drive to

-li
w
.u

.c

w
shorten stopping distance (lower arrival speed v0) or enlarge the door

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
zone.

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w
If this is not possible the stopping accuracy may be not very good.

p
ft

-li
w
The level zone (parameters "Level zone ↑" and "Level zone ↓") is too

.u
Level zone too

.c
-li

p
w

ft
small for lift

n
small in relation to the measured braking distances for relevel spped
p

.u

.c
-li
speed! Automatic w
.u

.c

vN. Thus, re-levelling is not possible.

ft
w
calculation <ET>

p
w

ft

n
When pressing ENTER the parameters for the flush zone are adjusted

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

automatically. However, it is better to lower the re-levelling speed vN

p
w

ft
p

.u
on the drive if possible.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Re-level speed For lifts with safety unit to protect against uncontrolled movement
w

p
w

w
f

Too fast for

.u
UCM (EN81-A3) the lift must be switched off if the re-level speed

t.c
-li
w

w
Lift with UCM!

p
w
exceeds 200 mm/s. But the speed measurement during set-up
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

procedured measured a re-level speed higher than 200 mm/s.

t.c

w
w

p
w

Adjust re-level speed!

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

Teach-in not This message appears if it is not necessary to do a teach-in trip (e.g.

w
w
w

neccessary, just for lift with only magnetic switches for positioning).
p

f
n

-li
w
.u

set param."Setup
t.c

p
w

ready“ to Yes

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

120/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
5. Travel commands and Door commands via keypad (HSE or

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
handheld terminal) w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

5.1 Travel commands

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
Using the keypad of the HSE or hand-held terminal travel movements of the lift can be
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

performed (similar to the emergency recall operation). However,during these movements the

p
w

ft
p

safety circuit is not affected and must be completely closed.

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
If the menu "travel commands" is started as the lift moves, then an emergency stop is carried

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
out first.

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
While the menu "traveling motion" is active, all other movements (also emergency recall
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
operation and inspection control) are disabled.

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

The following commands can be set:

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

‘1’: Movement in upward direction with fast emergency recall operation speed vR
t.c

w
w
w

f
‘3’: Movement in downward direction with fast emergency recall operation speed vR
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

‘4’: Movement in upward direction with slow (normal) emergency recall operation speed vRS
w

p
w

n
up

‘6’: Movement in downward direction with slow (normal) emerg. recall operation speed vRS
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
The lift moves as long as the corresponding key is pressed. When releasing the button, the
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
lift stops.

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

At movements using the keypad , the lift does not stop independently (unless the safety
p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

circuit is interrupted). It is thus e.g. possible to drive via keyboard the lift up to the limit switch.
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

If at the start of the menu item "travel commands" the doors are open, then the door will be
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

closed first when a key is pressed ('1' '3' '4' or '6'). Are the doors closed and the key is still w
.u

.c
li
w

pressed, then the lift starts the travel movement.

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
If the handheld terminal is disconnected while the menu item "travel commands" is activated,
w
w

ft

the lift does not automatically return to normal operation. The handheld terminal must then w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

be re-connected and the menu item "travel commands" must be closed (it is, of course, also
w

ft
w
ift

li
w

possible to closed the menu directly on the HSE).

.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

Error messages in the “ Travel commands” menu

.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

If no movements can be performed with the keyboard by any lift controller error, then the
p-
w
p-

ft

appropriate error message is displayed on the bottom line of the LCD display:
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

- “Safety line off”: Safety circuit is not closed

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

- “CAN-Error Drive”: CAN bus connection to the drive disturbed

w
p-

ft
n

.u

- “Brake error”: Motor brake is not opened or closed

li
w
.u

.c

p-

- "Timeout Stopping": No signal from drive in time that lift did stop
w
w

ft

w
.u

- “Contactor error”: Travel contactors not energized or de-energized

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

- “Drive error”: Error message from drive (e.g. VVVF)

w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

Check error stack for more informations about the error.

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

121/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
5.2 Door commands by keypad

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Using the keypad of the HSE or the handheld terminal door commands may be set and at
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
the same time the reaction of the door can be tested (door switch, light barrier, reversing

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

contact, etc.).

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Door commands can be given only if the lift is at standstill.

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
While the menu "Door commands" is active, all other movements (also emergency recall

ft
p

.u
-li
w
operation and inspection control) are disabled.
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

After starting the menu "Door commands" the same state image 2 appears (Door state) as

p
w
w

described in chapter "State displays".

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
The following commands can be set by short pressing the corresponding button:

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

‘1’: Open car door 1

-li
w
.u

t.c

‘2’: Close car door 1 (Light screen is active)

w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
‘3’: Close car door 1 (Light screen is deactivated - "Nudging")

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
‘4’: Open car door 2
w

f
n

-li
w
f

‘5’: Close car door 2 (Light screen is active)

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

‘6’: Close car door 2 (Light screen is deactivated - "Nudging")

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

‘7’: Open car door 3

t.c

w
w

‘8’: Close car door 3 (Light screen is active)

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

‘9’: Close car door 3 (Light screen is deactivated - "Nudging")

w

p
w
p

‘0’: Stop all doors immediately

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

In lifts with manually operated revolving landing doors, the car doors can be closed

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
with keyboard commands only when the revolving landing door is closed and thus the

p
w

ft
w

.u
safety circuit input SK2 of HSE is set.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft

5.3 Door commands by inspection switches

w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

By simultaneously pressing the inspection up and down push for at least 5 seconds (while w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

inspection is switched on), the controller starts the door test mode. As a acknowledge signal,
w

ft
w
ift

li
w

buzzer, gong and bypass signal are switched on briefly (starting with HSE software version
.u

.c

p-
w

1.43j)
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w

In this mode, the car doors can be opened by pressing the inspection up-button and closed
ft

li
w
.u

.c

by operating the inspection down-button. When releasing the button, the door movement will
li

p-
w
p-

ft

be stopped immediately.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

By turning off the inspection switch the door test mode is terminated.
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

122/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

-li
w
.u

.c

w
6. Test of the safety functions of the lift control (Technical

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
inspection) w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

w
Most safety features of the lift controller are implemented through safety switches or safety

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
circuits. This section only describes the functions in which control software or the hardware

-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w
of the control modules get involved in the implementation of the safety function.

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
Partial parameters must be changed for testing a function. In this case, the parameters
p

.u
-li
w
.u

should not be permanently stored, so that after a system-reset, the original parameter values
t.c

w
w

p
w

n
are available again.

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
If the internal error counter has reached its limit due to tests carried out (state display 1

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
shows "!Repair!"; see chapter "Error counter"), then the error counter can be cleared by
w

p
w

w
f

activating the emergency recall operation switch for a few seconds. After switching off this
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
switch again, the controller returns to normal operation.
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
To test the safety features there are 2 different ways:
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

1. A largely automated way can be automatically carried out the required interventions in
t.c

w
w
w

the control sequence of the lift controller and the auditor has to start only this menu

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

item.
w

p
w

n
2. A "conventional" way, at which parameters are manually adjusted or cables must be
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

clamped.

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

For both ways basic knowledge to use the control menu is required.
w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
If any test is done, hydraulic lifts always run to lowest floor before they stop operation
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

("E.Homing").
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

Below both options are described.

n

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

6.1. Automated Test

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

6.1.1 Testing the safety circuit for moving with open doors w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w

The lift must be in normal operation. To start the test the menu item "Technical check" ->
ift

li
w
.u

.c

"Open door safety" must be selected.

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

On the HSE or handheld terminal the actual floor is displayed in the top line. In the 2nd line
p-

ft
w
ft

the actual lift state is displayd (normally "Standstill", "Moving" or "Arrival").

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

If the lift is in "Standstill" state, the controller sets a car call to any other floor. When starting
.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft

the trip to this floor the lift controller will not switch off the door zone signal (KH7 stays on).
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

When arriving the destination floor the door lock overbridging is not carried out and the lift
n

.u
li
w
.u

displays the error "KH5 n.on".

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

Since the safety circuit is in the wrong switch state after this test, a reset of the error can be
w
p-

ft
w

carried out only by turning off the control voltage (or the main switch) incl. disconnecting the
n

li
w
.u

.c

battery cable.
p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

123/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
6.1.2 Testing the trip time monitoring

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
The lift must be in normal operation. For testing ,the menu item "Technical check"->"Trip
n

.u

.c
-li
w
time" must be started.
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

In the display of the HSE the actual floor is displayed. In the 2nd line the current controller

p
w

ft

n
p

state is displayed (normally "Standstill", "Moving" or "Arrival").

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
If the lift is in "Standstill" state, the controller sets a car call to any other floor. When starting

.u

.c
-li
w

p
the trip to this floor the parameter "Triptime[s]" is automatically set to 2 seconds.

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
After expiration of the trip time an emergency stop is carried out and the new state "Trip

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

time" is displayed.

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

Exiting the menu item with ESC, the parameter "Triptime [s]" will be set back to the old value

w
w

p
w

n
and the error will be deleted.

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

6.1.3 Testing the final limit switches

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

The lift must be in normal operation. For testing ,the menu item "Technical check"-

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

>"Limitswitch top" or "Limitswitch bot." must be started.

t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

In the display of the HSE the actual floor is displayed. In the 2nd line the current controller
w

p
w

n
up

state is displayed (normally "Standstill", "Moving" or "Arrival"). In 3rd line the actual position
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

in mm is displayed, while the 4th line shows the differenc between floor level of the actual

w
w

f
n

floor and the actual position.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w
p

f
n

.u
The lift controller sets itself a call to the top or bottom floor. If the lift is already in the top or
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

bottom floor the lift first sets a call to any other floor, before starting the trip to the top or
p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

bottom floor.
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

When arriving the top or bottom floor the lift will slow down like in normal operation, but then
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

will go up to the final limit switch with arrival speed v0.

n

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

If the lift hits the final limit switch, the new state "SL on trip", followed by "SL error" and, after
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

a few seconds, "Limit sw.".

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

In 4th line it is displayd now the exact triggering position of the final limit switch (if the lift uses
w

ft
w
ift

li
w

a digital positioning system like AWG or encoder).

.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

If the lift is then manually lowered when testing the upper limit switch so far that the top limit
.c

p-

ft
w

is switched on again, then a homing to the bottom landing takes place, if it is a hydraulic lift.
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

Between tripping the final limit switch and storing this state the lift controller needs 3 to
.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

5 seconds. This time delay is necessary before lowering the lift manually for testing
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

homing function of hydraulic lifts.

w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

When exiting the limit switch test menu with ESC, no return to normal operation takes
w
w

ft

place (starting from software version 1.29i), because that partially led to irritation at the
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

test sequence. Here then a reset is required (menu item "Reset HSE")
ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

124/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
If the lift controller on reaching the final limit switch does not display "Limit sw." after a

-li
w
.u

.c

w
few seconds, then usually the parameter "Top limit" or "Bot.limit" is set incorrectly.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
6.1.4 Overspeed

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

6.1.4.1 Moving with overspeed

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
In order to really test the burst pipe protection (hydraulic lifts) or the safety gear it is

.u

.c
-li
w

p
necessary to run the lift with overspeed.

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
By lifts with CANopen connection this test may be done fully automatic, because the lift

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

controller directly sets the moving speed by CAN bus. By this test the moving speed is set to

p
w
w

150% of the nominal speed.

p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

n
For lifts without CANopen connection the moving speed must be increased manually, e.g. by

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

adjusting the hydraulic valve or by changing the nominal speed parameter inside the VVVF.

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

During this test the speed monitoring of the lift controller is deactivated (otherwise the lift
w

p
w

n
f
n

.u
would do an emergency stop before the lift reaches the set speed.

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

When starting the menu item "Technical check"“ -> „Speed limit“ ->„Overspeed trip“ the
.u

t.c
-li

p
w

actual floor is displayd in 1st line. In 2nd line the target floor must be entered. After pressing

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

ENTER the lift starts the trip to the selected floor. In 2nd line the actual lift state is displayed
t.c

w
w

now. In the 3rd line the actual speed is displayed while 4th line shows the maximum speed

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

reached (only lifts with digital positioning like AWG or encoder).

w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

6.1.4.2 Testing the speed monitoring

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

The lift controller constantly monitors whether or not the rated speed of the lift is exceeded by
.c
-li
w

p
w

more than 20%.

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

The test can only be done in lifts with digital positioning (like AWG or encoder). An important
ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

requirement for this test is, that the parameter "v Nominal" is set correctly (see "General
w
p-

ft
w

parameters" -> "v nominal"; automatically measured during teach-in).

n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

The lift must be in normal operation. For testing ,the menu item "Technical check"“ -> „Speed w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
limit“ ->„Speed check“ must be started.
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

In the display of the HSE the actual floor is displayed. In the 2nd line the current controller
w

ft

n
n

.u

state is displayed (normally "Standstill", "Moving" or "Arrival").

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

If the lift is in "Standstill" state, the controller sets a car call to any other floor. When starting
.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

the trip to this floor the parameter "v nominal" is automatically set to 80% of its original value.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

After exceeding the speed threshold an emergency stop is carried out and the new state
n

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

"Overspeed" is displayed.
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

Exiting the menu item with ESC, the parameter "v nominal" will be set back to the old value
w
w
w

ft

and the error will be deleted.

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w

6.1.5 Testing the safety gear

.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

The automated testing of the safety gear is only possible if:

n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

125/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
- A coil for remote triggering the safety gear is provided which is driven by an output of the

-li
w
.u

.c

w
lift controller. This output is to be programmed as follows :

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
Fct Spec.out.

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
Sub Saf.geartest
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
Polarity invers

.c
-li

p
w

ft
or

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

- A coil for descent stopping system via safety gear is provided which is driven by the lift
.c

ft
w

p
w

controller. This output is to be programmed as follows :

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Fct Safety space

p
w

ft
p

Sub Governor
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

Polarity normal

w
w

p
w

n
(additional parameters see „Special param." –> "Safety Shelter“).

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
or

p
w
w

f
n

.u
- the safety gear is controlled by an electronic system PSU (e.g. Limax33CP)

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
When starting the menu item "Technical check" -> "Safety gear" first the floor where the

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

safety gear should be triggered must be entered. With the cursor keys it is also possible to
p

f
n

-li
w
.u

select a reduced speed for safety gear test (only HSE software version 1.38b or newer). Pre-
t.c

p
w

n
setting is nominal speed v3, but reduced speeds v1 or v2 can be selected.
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
The lift then moves towards to the floor which had been set. Between 300 and 500 mm
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

before reaching the defined floor (depending on the lift speed) the safety gear is triggered, so
w

p
w

n
up

that the lift within functioning safety gear stops approximately at flush level of the selected
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

floor (advantageous if, for example, test weights must be unloaded).

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Within the control display of HSE / handheld terminal the trigger position is displayed in the

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

3rd line and in the 4th line the way in mm, that was laid back after the safety gear was
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

triggered (only with digital positioning like AWG or encoder).

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

6.1.6 Testing the motor brake

p

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
The testing of the individual brake shoes is only possible if they are connected via separate
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

relays of the HSE.

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

The outputs for switching the brake have to be programmed as follows:

w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

Fct Drive
.c

w
p-

ft
w

Sub Brake cont.

ift

li
w
.u

.c

Signal no. 1
p-
w
w

ft

Polarität normal
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

Beginning with HSE Software version 1.43d it is necessary that every brake output has
li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

a unique number. Up to HSE software version 1.43c only relays of HSE can be used
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

as brake outputs
.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

6.1.6.1 No brake opening at start

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

When starting the menu item "Brake not open" the lift controller sets a car call in the top or
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

bottom floor (depending on which floor is further away from the current car position, i.e.,
p-

w
w
w

ft

depending on where the car is currently located, the brake test is performed in upward or
w
.u

.c
li
w

downward direction).
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-

When starting, the mechanical brake is not actuated, and it can be checked whether the lift
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

126/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
moves further even with closed brake. Any existing feedback contacts of the brake are to be

-li
w
.u

.c

w
ignored by the lift controller.

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
The LCD display will show how far the lift has possibly moved with closed brake.
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft
6.1.6.2 Drop off the brake or a single brake shoe while moving

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

This menu item is used to test, if the lift is slowing down if one brake fails operation.

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
When starting the menu item "Technical check" -> "Mechanical brake" -> "Brake off trip" the

p
w

ft
p

.u
lift controller sets a car call to the top or bottom floor (depending on which floor is further

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
away from the current car position, i.e., depending on where the car is currently, the brake

p
w

w
f

.u
test is performed in upward or downward direction ).

t.c
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

After reaching the rated lift speed, depending on the menu selection, one brake stays open
t.c

w
w

p
w

n
while all other brake outputs will be switched off. The drive controller is also turned off at this

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

moment; any existing feedback contacts of the mechanical brake will be ignored by the lift

w
w
w

f
controller.
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f

Within the LCD screen of HSE or handheld terminal, the position at which the brake is
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
switched off appears in the 3rd line. The 4th line indicates how far the car has moved since

w
w

f
n

-li
the shutdown (only with digital positioning like AWG or encoder). w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
6.1.6.3 Testing every single brake while lift is in standstill
-li
w
t.c

w
w

f
n

By this test every single brake shoe is tested while the lift is in standstill state. Always just 1

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

brake will stay closed while all other brakes are opened. The lift controller will check if the lift
w

p
w
p

moves by any single brake.

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

In order to carry out this test at least 2 independend by HSE relays controlled brakes are
.u

.c
-li
w

p
necessary.
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w

Timing parameters for this test may be set by parameter (“Special param.” – “Brake check”)
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

On LCD screen of HSE it is shown how many mm the lift did moveby this test.
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

6.1.7 Testing of A3 and down valve w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

With this menu item „A3/Down valve“ the lift controller first opens the down valve and checks
ft
w
ift

li
w

if the A3 valve will hold the lift in level. Second the A3 valve is opened and it is checked if the
.u

.c

p-
w
w

lift stays in level.

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w

Timing parameters for this test may be set by parameter (“Special param.” – “Valve check”)
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

On LCD screen of HSE it is shown how many mm the lift did move by A3 and down valve.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

6.1.8 Testing the monitoring inputs for motor brake (roped lifts) or valves
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

(hydraulic lifts)
w

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

With this menu item “Brake/Valv.check” the monitoring inputs of the lift controller for motor
p-

w
w
w

ft

brake or hydraulic valves are checked.

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

If starting the test menu a sub menu for selecting the brake or valve input appears.
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

127/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
6.1.8.1 Brake / valve opened while lift is standstil

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
With this menu item the reaction of the lift controller is tested if the brake or valve is opened

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
while the lift is not moving.
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

For this the selected monitoring input is inverted internally. Depending on the defined

p
w

ft

n
p

monitoring time the lift controller goes to error state.

n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
The LCD display shows the actual floor, the actual position and the lift controller state.

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
6.1.8.2 Brake / valve doesn't open on trip start

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

With this menu item the reaction of the lift controller is tested if the brake or valve is not

p
w
w

f
opened while the lift controller starts moving.
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
The lift controller sets itself a car call to any other floor and ignores the brake / valve
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
monitoring input. Depending on the defined monitoring time the lift controller carries out an

w
w

f
n

-li
emergency stop. w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
After 3 new trials to start a trip the lift controllers goes out of operation.
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

6.1.8.3 Brake / valve doesn't closed on trip end

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

With this menu item the reaction of the lift controller is tested if the brake or valve is not
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

closed at trip end.

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
The lift controller sets itself a car call to any other floor. At trip end the brake / valve

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li

monitoring input is ignored by the lift controller. Depending on the defined monitoring time the
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

lift controller goes out of operation.

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

6.1.9 Testing the contactor monitoring (Contactor drop off control)

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

The lift must be in normal operation. For testing, the menu item "Technical check"->"Runn. w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

contactor " must be started.

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w

Here must be entered first, which relay of the HSE should not be switched off at trip end. The
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

selection is made by pressing a numeric key like shown in the table below:
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

Numeric key HSE - Relay

p-
w
w

ft

1 KH11
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

2 KH12
w

ft
w
ft

li
w

3 KH13
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

4 KH14
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

5 KH15
.u

.c

p-

ft
w

6 KH16
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

7 KH41
p-
w
p-

ft

8 KH42
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

Only the numeric keys are accepted, where the appropiate relay is programmed as a drive
.u

.c
li
w

output relay (output function "Drive").

p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

128/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
After defining the relay number the lift controller sets at random car call to another floor. At

-li
w
.u

.c

w
the end of the trip to this floor the corresponding HSE relay is not switched off. Within the

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
LCD display the current floor and the control condition are displayed.

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
By pressing the ESC key, the HSE relay is switched off and the test is ended.

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

6.1.10 Uncontrolled movement

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
For testing the lift behavior by uncrontrolled movement the lift controller starts a trip in

.u

.c
-li
w

w
upward or downward direction (like selected).

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
The LCD display shows the actual floor, actual position and difference to floor level (and with

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
this the distance the cabin moves away from floor level until the UCM device stops the lift).
-li
w

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

This test is only possible if the UCM protection is done by the lift controller. If a UCM system
t.c

w
w

p
w

n
from another manufacturer is used the test must be done according to that documentation.

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

For more details please refer to the TUEV certificate of the lift controller.

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

Up to HSE software version 1.38p this test is done for roped lifts by just opening the

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
motor brake. The lift will move than, depending of the load, in up or down direction
w

f
n

-li
w
f

away from level zone. Starting with HSE software version 1.38q the lift is moving by
.u

t.c
-li

p
motor force out of door zone into the selected direction.
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

6.1.11 Testing the Deceleration monitoring circuit

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
The lift must be in normal operation. For testing, the menu item "Technical check"->"

p
w
p

f
n

.u
Deceler.check" must be started.
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

For testing the deceleration monitoring circuit the lift moves to the selected final floor (top or
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

bottom), but will not slow down at the specified deceleration point („Parameter“ – „Special
w

.u
li
w
.u

param.“ – „Deceler.check“ – „Slow [mm]“). By this the monitoring circuit will trip and the error
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

is displayed.
n

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

The LCD display shows the actual floor, actual position and difference to floor level.
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

If the lift position is too closed to the selected final floor, then the lift first moves to a floor in w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
opposite direction, from where the lift is able to move with nominal speed to the final floor.
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w

6.2. Conventional Test

w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w

6.2.1 Testing the safety circuit for moving with open doors
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-

For conventional test a defective door zone switch SGM is simulated.

w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft

For this the door zone switch SGM is disconnected while the lift is moving (simulated error:
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

door zone switch not switched on while arriving door zone) or the SGM input is connected to
.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

0(24V) while the lift is still in a floor (simulated error: door zone switch SGM is not switched
n

.u
li
w
.u

off while leaving the door zone). In both cases lift stopps operation once the trip is finished.
.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

129/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
6.2.2 Testing the trip time monitoring

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
For testing the parameter "Triptime[s]" (menu "Parameter" -> "Timer parameter") is set to a
n

.u

.c
-li
w
value which is less than the time it takes for the lift for the ride between 2 floors (leaving a
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
door zone and entering the next door zone). Normally a setting of 2s works for this test.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

After that, a car call is given by keyboard (menu item "Set car calls" or keyboard command

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
„1xx↵“, e.g. „104↵“ for a car call to floor 4) .

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
If the "Triptime[s]" between switching on and off of the door zone switch SGM is exceeded ,
.u

t.c

w
w

p
then the lift performs an emergency stop and remains out of order. Within the LCD display
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

,the text "Trip time" appears at state display 1 alternately with "Repair" .

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

6.2.3 Testing of parking trip to lowest floor by hydraulic lifts

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
Hydraulic lifts must normally move to the bottom floor after at least 15 minutes. To test this

t.c
-li
w

w
w
function, the parameter "Parktime[s]" 1.32z parameters must be set to a smaller value (eg 20
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

seconds). This parameter is located in the menu "Parameter" -> "Special param." -> "Parking
t.c

p
w

trip" (by HSE software older than 1.33 the parameter is located in the menu "Parameter" ->

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

"Timer parameter").
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

The modified time is only activated when the lift has carried out a new ride. Therefore, a car
w

p
w

n
up

command should be entered to any other floor. (Menu item "car calls" or keyboard command
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

"1xx↵", eg "104↵" for a car call in Floor 4).

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
After the lift has reached the new floor, the lift moves automatically to the "Park floor" after
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w

the "Parktime[s], if no new call is placed (at hydraulic lifts the lowest level should always be
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

set as "Park floor").

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

To prevent the entry of new landing calls while testing, the landing calls should be disabled
p

.u
li
w
.u

.c

(via the menu item "Test" -> "Disable LC" or by keyboard command "6↵").
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
6.2.4 Testing of emergency light
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

If the supply voltage of the car light is switched off, the lift controller automatically switches
.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

on the emergency-light. The emergency light is also switched on if the power supply of the lift
n

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

controller is switched off.

.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-

By hydraulic lifts it can be additionally checked whether the lift moves to the bottom floor
w
w

ft

immediately.
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

6.2.5 Testing the final limit switches

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

First the lift should be moved to top or bottom floor with a car call (menu item "Set car calls"
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

or keyboard command "1xx↵", eg "104↵" for a car call in Floor 4).

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-

After that the menu item "Travel commands" is started" and the lift is moved by pressing the
w
p-

ft
n

.u

'1' or '4' key (for upward direction) or '3' or '6' (for downward direction) is driven. Once the
li
w
.u

.c

p-

final limit switch is reached, the lift will stop immediately. Within the bottom line of the LCD
w
w

ft

display , the message "Safety line off" appears.

.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

130/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
After performing the test, the menu item "Travel commands" must be finished by

-li
w
.u

.c

w
pressing ESC. Otherwise even the emergency recall operation will not work and it is

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
not possible to move the lift away from the final limit switch.

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft
6.2.6 Testing the traction (driving ability)

n
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

Since the emergency recall operation switch bridges the final limit switches, it can be tested,

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
directly after testing the final limit switches (see above), if the car or the counterweight are

.u

.c
-li
w

w
pulled up or if the ropes begin to slip on the drive pulley if moving on.

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
6.2.7 Testing the speed monitoring

p
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

The lift controller constantly monitors whether or not the rated speed of the lift is exceeded by

p
w
w

f
n

.u
more than 20%.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

The test can only be done in lifts with digital positioning (like AWG or encoder).

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
To test this monitoring, the parameter "v Nominal" is set to a smaller value.
.u

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

After that, a car command is given via keyboard to another floor (menu item "Set car calls" or
t.c

w
w
w

keyboard command "1xx↵", .e.g "104↵" for a car call in Floor 4).

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

n
up

It should be noted that the distance to the target floor is large enough that the lift starts at
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

nominal speed v3.

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Upon reaching the 120% of the newly setting of parameter "v nominal" the lift stops

p
w
p

f
n

.u
immediately and displays the error "Overspeed" within the LCD screen (state display 1).
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

After the emergency stop, the lift moves to the nearest floor and then starts again. Only after
.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

the 3rd occurrence of "overspeed" the lift is completely out of order.

w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

131/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
7. Parameters of lift controller

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
-li
w
The lift controller MLC 8000 has a large number of parameters by which the controller can be
.c

ft
w

p
ft

n
adapted to various requirements.

-li
w
.u

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
p

.u
All parameters are stored in a nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) of the HSE (ICs U1 and U2 of

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
the HSE). These memory modules are located in a socket, so they can be replaced easily

ft
w

p
w

ft

-li
w
and without tools, if the HSE is defective and must be replaced. Therefore the parameters

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w
must not be re-entered while replacing a HSE module.

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
7.1 Saving parameters
w

w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Newly changed parameters are initially stored only in the RAM of the HSE. This means that

p
w
w

f
n

.u
after a reset or power down all the changes are lost.

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
For fixed saving of the parameters in EEPROM, the menu item "Save parameters" must be

p
w

w
f
cn

.u
started or the storage process can be started by the key command "9↵". The saving process

t.c
-li
w

w
w
w

takes a few seconds and may be carried out while the lift is in normal operation.
p

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
By this all changed parameters are generally saved, i.e., it is not possible to save only
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

individual parameters.
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

7.2 Parameter backup

w

p
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

All parameters of the lift controller are completely stored in the EEPROM U1.
t.c

w
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

In the second EEPROM U2, a copy of the parameter set can be stored for backup purposes.
w

p
w

This backup copy can be created by the menu item “Create backup”in the menu "Parameter"
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

- "Parameter backup" . All parameters of the first EEPROM are identical copied to the second

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

EEPROM.

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft
w

.u
If accidentally parameters of the lift controller are changed and saved and the lift isn't working
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
anymore, then via menu item "Reload Backup" the parameter set can be reloaded from the
w
w

ft

w
.u

backup copy. However, it must be sure that in fact there is a backup in the second EEPROM.
.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w

After reloading the backup the parameters need to be saved separately (see above).
.u

.c

.
p-

w
w
w

ft

w
n

.u

.c
li
w

After each change of parameters or at the latest after commissioning, a backup of the
.c

w
p-

ft
w

parameters should be made.

ift

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

It is also possible to make a copy of all parameters on a computer with the PC

p-

ft
w
ft

software "Liftcontrol". See manual of "Liftcontrol"

li
w
.u

.c
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

7.3 Changing parameters

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

Parameters can be changed using the keyboard or the HSE or with the handheld terminal.
n

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

Both the changing and saving of the parameters can be carried out during normal operation
w
w
w

ft

of the lift.
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

132/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
For most parameters, the changes will take effect immediately. Only when changing basic

-li
w
.u

.c

w
parameters such as number of floors, number of doors, type of positioning, drive type, a

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
reset (voltage incl. Battery on / off, reset button or Software reset by keypad) is required.

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
To change a parameter the cursor is moved by cursor keys to this parameter (cursor is a

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
flashing rectangle shown on the left side).
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
By pressing the ENTER key "↵", the cursor jumps to the right and is now represented by an

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

underscore (by some parameters the cursor disappears).

p
w

ft
p

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Now, the new parameter value can be entered. Here 2 different parameter types are
w

p
w

w
f

distinguished:

.u

t.c
-li
w

p
- Numeric parameters: The new parameter value can be entered using the numeric keys.

w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
- Text parameters: The parameter value can be selected from a list using the cursor keys.
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
-li
w

By pressing ENTER again, the new parameter value is accepted and the cursor reappears

w
w
w

on the left edge of the display as a flashing rectangle.

p

f
n

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w

n
If the ESC button is operated instead, the parameter is set to the original value.
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
w

f
n

7.4 Changing of parameter “Floor name”

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
w

The parameters "Floor name" consist of 2 symbols for the car indicator.

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w

The procedure for entering these parameters differs somewhat from the normal parameter

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

input.
w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

t.
After pressing ENTER, first the number, letter or symbol for the left sign for the floor indicator

w
w

p
w

f
n

may be selected with the cursor keys. By repeated pressing of ENTER the cursor jumps to

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
the right character and it is also possible to select this sign by cursor keys. After that, another

p
w

ft
w

.u
pressing of ENTER is required to accept the changes.
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

7.5 Transferring parameters when replacing defective modules

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

Since all control parameters are stored inside the HSE, no settings are required if defective
n

li
w
.u

.c

.
p-

components (except for the HSE) have to be changed. Only the node number of ESE and

w
w
w

ft

TSE modules as well as ASE and PSE must be set. w

n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w

If the HSE needs to be replaced, it is possible to apply the EEPROM memory of the old HSE
.u

.c

p-
w

(of course only as long as these memory circuits are not damaged).
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

p-

ft
w

Both EEPROM circuits U1 and U2 (see Annex) are carried out socketed and can be pulled
ft

li
w
.u

.c

out of the socket without any special tools by hand or using a small screwdriver.
li

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

When inserting the EEPROM in the new HSE it is to be ensured that the two circuits are not
p-

ft
w
w

ft

interchanged, and that the direction of insertion is maintained (not rotated 180 °!).
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u

To change the circuits the power supply to the HSE must be switched off and the external
li
w
.u

.c

p-

battery must be disconnected.capt

w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

li
w

After switching on the power again, the HSE tests if there is a valid parameter set in the
.u

.c

p-
w

EEPROM. If not, then following message appears " No actual parameter set! Load
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

133/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 w

lif
n

w
.u

t.c

p-
w
w

lif
n

.u
w
INTEC GmbH

t.c

p-

w
w

w
lif

.u

.c
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
p-

t
lif
04/01/2021

w
.u

.c

p-
Operating manual V2.0

w
w
w

ft

w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
w

ft
w

n
default:ENT, Skip ESC ".

-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft

n
n

.u
This message can have 3 different reasons:

.c
-li
w
.c

ft
- The EEPROM is actually empty or defective
w

p
ft

-li
w
.u
- The two EEPROMs are reversed when changing

.c
-li

p
w

ft

n
- There is a new HSE used with a different (newer) software version
p

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

ft
w

p
w

ft

If pressing ENTER, all parameters are checked for validity. All parameters that are within

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

their valid range are retained, all other parameters (for example, all in a new software version

p
w

ft
p

newly added parameters) are set to a default value.

n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w

p
w

w
If, after the next reboot of the HSE (on / off voltage or reset button), this message appears
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
again, then the EEPROM is probably faulty.

p
w
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
Important note: When changing the HSE or replacing defective relays only relays

p
w

w
f
cn

.u

t.c
with 2 changeover contacts must be used!
-li
w

w
w
w

f
n

-li
w
.u

7.6 Parameters for freely programmable inputs and outputs

t.c

p
w

n
f
n

Almost all inputs and outputs of the lift controller MLC 8000 are freely programmable and

.u

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
w
have no fixed function.
w

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

p
The function of the inputs and outputs can be set by parameters via the keyboard of the HSE
w

n
up

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

or the hand-held terminal. It does not matter in most cases (exceptions: see description of
t.c

w
w

the relevant function) whether the input or output function is set for the HSE, the FVE or for

f
n

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

an ESE or TSE board.

w

p
w
p

f
n

.u
-li
w
.u

t.c

There are only a few functions that can only be set to specific modules (e.g. drive

t.
w
w

p
w

f
n

speed signals can only be programmed for ASE and HSE). Even it is possible to

-li
w
f

.u

.c
-li
w

w
programm such functions like speed signals to a FVE - they will not work.

p
w

ft
w

.u
li
w
.u

.c

p-

w
A parameter for an input or output consists of 6 sub parameters:
w
w

ft

w
.u

- Main function Fct

.c
li
w

w
p-

ft
w

- Sub function Sub

n

li
w
.u

- Lift
.c

.
Lift
p-

w
w
w

ft

- Floor Floor w
n

.u

.c
li
w
.c

w
- Door Door
p-

ft
w
ift

li
w

- Switching Logic Logic

.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

Depending on the selected main function only the necessary sub parameters will be
.c

p-

ft
w

displayed (for example if "Load" is selected as main function, the sub parameter "Door" is not
ft

li
w
.u

.c
li

necessary and will not be displayed).

p-
w
p-

ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

The sub parameter "Lift" is only displayed, if the input or output is programmed for an ESE
p-

ft
w
w

ft

parameter.
li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft
n

.u

Sometimes the name of any sub parameter is changed depending on the selected main
li
w
.u

.c

p-

function (for example if "Land.call" is selected as main function, the name of the sub function
w
w

ft

w
.u

is changed from "Sub" to "Dir", because the sub function defines the call direction of the
.c
li
w

w
p-

landing call).
ft
w

li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

If all settings for an input or output are finished, one of the following items has to be selected:
ft

n
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-

ft
w

134/213
li
w
.u

.c

p-
w
w

ft
n

.u
-li
w
.c
 n w w
w ift w up cn
w
.u .c w .u
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft
.u .c w .u .c

-
-
w p- n w
-li
f w p n
w li .u t.c w
w n
04/01/2021
-li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f t.c w p n w
w li .u n w -li .u
.u
ft
.c w p- w f w
n w li .u t.c w
p-
p- w ft w p n w lif
.c
INTEC GmbH

li .u n w -li .u t.c
ft
.c w p- w f w p n
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
-li .u .c w .u .c
ft
.c w p- n w
-li
f w p n
n w li .u t.c w
w ft w p n w
-li
ft w
.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f w
Confirm: All sub parameter will be applied

w
p- t.c w p n w
li .u w
ESC: Cancel all changes, back to old settings

w w p n -li .u
Operating manual V2.0

ft w

135/213
ft w p
Lift controller MLC 8000

.u .c w .u .c
w n w
-li
f w p n w
w
p-
li .u t.c w w
w ft w p- n w
-li
ft w
.u
.u .c w .u .c p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t.c
ft w n w
-li
f .u n
.u .c w
p-
.u t.c w p-
n w li ft w p n w
p-
li .u .c w w lif
t
ft w n w
-li
f .u .c
.c w
p- t.c w p n
n w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
w n w -li .u .c w
w
p- w f t.c w p n
w li .u n w -li
.u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p- w f t.c w p n w
li .u n w -li .u
ft
.c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t. w p n w lif
.
 w w
.u .c w
ift
.c w p n w
n w -li .u
w f t.c w p
.u n w -li
w p w ft
w -li .u .c
w ft.c w p n
.u n w -li
w p w ft w
w -li .u .c w
w f t.c w p n w
.u n w -li .u
p- w f t.c w p-
li .u n w
ft
.c w p w lif
n w -li .u t.c
p- w f t.c w p n
li .u n w -li
ft
.c w p w ft
n w -li .u .c
w f t.c w p n
.u n w -li
w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
w f t.c w p n w
.u n w -li .u
w p w ft w
w -li .u .c w
w f t.c w p n w
.u n w -li .u
p- w ft w p-
w lif .u .c w
t.c w p n w lif
.u n w -li .u t.c
p- w f t.c w p- n
li .u n w
ft
.c w p w lif
t
n w -li .u .c
w f t.c w p n
lif .u n w -li
t .c w p w ft w
n w -li .u .c w
w f t.c w p n
.u n w -li
w p w ft w
w -li .u .c w
w f t.c w p n w
.u n w -li .u
w p w ft w
w -li .u .c w
p-
w f t.c w p n w li
.u n w -li .u
p- w f t.c w p-
li .u n w
.u
ft
.c w p w lif
n w -li .u t.c
p- w f t.c w p n
li .u n w -li
ft
.c w p w ft
n w -li .u .c
w f t.c w p n
.u n w -li
w p w ft w
w -li .u .c w
w f t.c w p n w
.u n w -li .u
p w ft w
-li
f .u .c w
t.c w p n w
n w -li .u
w ft w p-
.u .c w
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
w

ft
w

p
7.7 Functions for free programmable inputs and outputs

ft

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

7.7.1. Input functions

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w
Main function Sub function/ Floor Doors Description

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Direction/

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
Floor
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
„normal“ landing call

w
Land.call Direction: Call floor Doors
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

- Up

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
- Down

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
- Up+Dn
.u

t.c

w
w
w
Land.call1 Direction: Call floor Doors Mainly used for landing calls inside a group of lift, if a landing call should call any

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

special lift.

.u

t.c
-li
w

- Up

w
.c

w
Example: In a lift group just 1 lift goes to lowest floor. Normally it doesn't matter for a

p
w

n
w

- Down
p

w
user which lift will serve a landing call. But if the user wants to go to lowest floor it is

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

- Up+Dn important that just that 1 lift serves the floor. This additional landing call should be
t.c

w
w
w
programmed as Land.call1.

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
Land.call2 Direction: Call floor Doors See above

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
w
- Up

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

- Down
t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
- Up+Dn

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Special LC Call floor - Doors Special landing call (Landing call with higher priority than "normal" landing call
.u

t.c

p
w

n
w

p
w

VIP landing call (Landing call with higher priority than special landing call

f
VIP LC Call floor - Doors
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

Emerg.LC Call floor - Doors Emergency landing call (Landing call with higher priority than VIP landing call

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

Car call Call floor - Doors „normal“ car call

n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Spec.funct. Car fan - - Car fan push

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
More settings see "Special param." - "Car fan"

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Special run - - Special run (landing calls off - only car calls active)

w
w

p
w

More settings see „Special param." – "Special run adj.“

n
w

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

VIP run - - VIP run (landing calls off - only car calls active)
.u

.c

w
p-

w
More settings see „Special param." – "VIP run adj.“

ft
w
w

ft

Emerg. run - - Emergency run (landing calls off - only car calls active)

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
137/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
Main function Sub function/ Floor Doors Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Direction/

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Floor

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
More settings see „Special param." – "Emerg. run adj.“

.u

.c
-li

ft
Hazard run - - Hazardous good transportation function

p
w

ft

n
p

More settings see„Special param." – "Hazard transport"

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Lift off - - Switching off the lift in current / next floor

.c

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Input for activating the "Out of order" display (e.g. for maintenance activities)

.u
Lift off disp - -

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

w
Door open push

ft
Door op.push Floor (only Doors

p
w

ft

n
w

More settings see „Door parameter – Gener.door para.“

p

-li
w
n

.u
if set on ESE

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
input)
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

Door cl.push Floor (only Doors Door close push

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
More settings see „Door parameter – Gener.door para.“

p
if set on ESE

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
input)
.u

t.c

w
w
w

p
Dr.stop push Floor (only Doors Door stop push (for keep door open e.g. for loading / unloading)
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

if set on ESE

w
.c

p
w

n
w

input)
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Dr.stopswitch - Doors Door stop switch (for keep door open e.g. for loading / unloading)

w
w

p
w

f
n
Presence.sen.. Floor (only Doors Anteroom surveillance to extend the door open time

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

(if passengers are waiting for the lift)

t.c

w
if set on ESE

p
w

n
w

f
n

.u
input)

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
Push input to clear all calls
Clear calls - -
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Clear Carcall - - Push input to clear all car calls.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
The lift stops in next floor and opens the doors. If doors are not enabled in this floor, the

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
n

lift moves to the next floor with enabled doors.

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

LC off - - Disable all landing calls

w
w

p
w

f
n
Remote switch off lift
p

Remote off Floor Doors

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

First lift goes to the floor programmed with this input and opens the door. Second the lift
t.c

p
w
w

goes to the floor programmed in „Special param. – Remote off“ and goes out of
p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

operation.
.u

t.c
-li
w

w
Starting with HSE software version 1.44s “Remote off” is available as main function and
w

p
w

n
w

up to 5 different functions can be programmed.

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

Interm.door - - Switch on intermediate door.

.c

w
p-

ft
w

If intermediate door is open the lift may only be used in special run mode (key switch)
w

ft

li
w
or any other special control with higher priority (VIP run, ...)
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
138/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
Main function Sub function/ Floor Doors Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Direction/

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Floor

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Clock run 1 - - Input to start clock runs.

.u

.c
-li

ft
More settings see „Special param." – "Clock run" and also "Door releases"

p
w

ft

n
p

Note: The clock run 1 may be activated by this input as well as by the internal timer

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

(see „Special param." – "Clock run“)

.c

p
w

ft
w Input to start clock runs.
Clock run 2 - -

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
More settings see „Special param." – "Clock run" and also "Door releases"

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w
Clock run 3 - - See above

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u
Clock run 4 - - See above

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
w See above
Clock run 5 - -

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u
Safety beam - - Safety beam for lift without car door

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
w

n
w

Seismic wave - - Seismic wave (earthquake warning)

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
If lift is moving in direction toward counterweight lift stops immediately and move to next
.u

t.c

w
w
floor into opposite direction with reduced speed.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
If lift is already moving away from counter weight, lift will reduce speed and stop in next

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

floor.

w
.c

p
w

n
w

After deactivation and a defined waiting time lift will go back to normal operation.
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
For more settings see „Special parameter“ – „Earthquake mode“.
.u

t.c

w
w
Earthquake - - See seismic wave input above.
w

p
w

f
n
However, lift will not go back from earthquake mode even input is deactivated. Reset is

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

required for going back to normal operation.

t.c

p
w

n
w

Auto-call - - Starting the autocall function

p

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

More parameter see „Special param." – "Auto-call funct."

.u

t.c
-li

w
w Inputs for lifts with high traffic: During up peak (down peak) the lift only serves landing
- Up peak - -

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

calls in up direction (down direction) and ignores the landing calls in opposite direction.
n

.u
- Dn peak

t.c
-li
w
.u

Note: This function may be activated by this input as well as with the internal timer
t.c

p
w

n
w

function (see "Group control")

w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Final limit - - Additional contact on final limit switch to check, if the final limit switch is opened.
t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
n
Em.stop Signal no. - Emergency stop push operated (2 contact additional to contact in safety circuit)
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
With setting "Signal no." it is possible to connect different emergency stop pushes (e.g.
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
emergency stop pit, ememergency stop inspection, ...) to the lift controller.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Note: The same signal no. should not exist more than 1 time in a lift.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Anti-surfing - - Signal from anti-surfing device

w
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif

Phase error - - Contact from phase relay

n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

UPS error Signal no. - Error output from UPS

ft
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
139/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
Main function Sub function/ Floor Doors Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Direction/

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Floor

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
UPS discharged Signal no. - “Discharged” output from UPS

.u

.c
-li

ft
w

p
AWG2 err. Signal no. - Error signal from AWG2 evaluation unit (POS2) if the "Double-AWG" is used for

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u
positioning

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
By using the signal no. (1 and 2) the error signal may be connected twice for safety

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

reasons (the evaluation board POS2 has 2 error outputs - 1 standard and 1 inverted)

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
Input for inspection limit switch
-li

Insp.limit Direction -
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

Insp.start - - Push button input to start a trip to a position, from where it is easy to go on top of car.
p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Position must be defined in “Positions/imp.” “Dec./stop dist.” – “Insp.start“
.u

t.c

p
w
w Input for function „Start blocking“ (only 1 lift should run at the same time, e.g. in case of
Start lock Signal no. -

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
emergency power supply): If this input is set this lift is blocked because another lift is
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
already moving.

p
w

n
w

Up to 8 lifts can be connected for this function.

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Lock active - - Input to activate the function “Start blocking”

t.c

w
w
w

p
w

f
Service mode - - In service mode only Inspection, Emergency recall operation and travel commands

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
from keypad may be used, otherwise lift is out of operation.
-li
w

w
.c

p
w
Test mode - - input to disable car and landing calls; can be used e.g. for technical test.

n
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Safety fct. Signal no. - Input function for a safety shutdown oft he lift. If this input is activated once, the lift will
.u

t.c

w
w
stay off until a reset function is activated (see below).
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
If the lift is moving while this function is activated, the lift will first finish this trip before
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

going out of operation.

t.c

p
w

n
w

Re-levelling, inspection operation, emergency recall operation and fireman operation

p

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

are still in work.

.u

t.c
-li

w
w Input to reset the safety shutdown (see above)
Safety reset - -

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Reset button input to return back from inspection pit mode

t.c
Insp.Reset - -
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Push: With this setting, the function is activated by simply pressing the input. Pulses:

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
By pressing 2*long - 2*short the function is activated (long: at least 1s, max 4s, short:

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

max 1s, distance between pulses less than 3s).

w
w

p
w

f
Thereby it is e.g. possible to additionally use a freely accessible landing call button as

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
"Reset Insp." (connecting the landing call push to a second input with function "Reset

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
Insp." - "Pulses")

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Load Reset - - Reset button if load measurement unit detected maximum load, rope difference or slack

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

rope.

w
w

p
w

n
w

SL bypass Signal no. Doors Safety circuit car or shaft door shorted (according to EN81-20) - lift only moves now
p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

with recall operation or inspection.

.u

.c

w
p-

w
For safety reason it is possible to use 2 (or more) inputs (with different "Signal no.) In

ft
w
w

ft

this case the lift controllers checks if all inputs are switched at the same time.

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
140/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
Main function Sub function/ Floor Doors Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Direction/

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Floor

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Open dr.trip - Doors Input enables trips with open car doors (e.g. freight lifts, hazardous goos lifts).

.u

.c
-li

ft
Additionally a safety circuit to bypass the safety line of the doors is necessary. Bypass

p
w

ft

n
p

must also be enabled/disabled by special output function “Open dr.trip”.

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

Piston trip - - Input to activate piston balance trip

.c

p
w

ft
w

p
w

ft

Limitation of max. lift speed by input (for example for reduced speed while emergency

n
Max.speed Type: v1 or -

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
power supply)
-li
w

w
v2

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
Call config. - - Input to activate "Call configuration mode"
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

See also "General param." - "Call config."

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

Input to activate test runs

f
Test runs - -

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Dr. lock test - - If the input "Door lock test" is avtivated, the lift always stops above floor limit in each

w
w

p
w

n
floor (in top floor below floor limit) depending of the setting "Lockt.[mm]".
w

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
In this way it is possible to check the shaft door lock in each floor (requirement in
.u

t.c

w
w
Austria)
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Car empty - - Sensor if car is empty

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Required for "Call configuration mode" to switch from 1 configuration to next.

w
.c

p
w

n
w

Group off - - Input to separate a group of lifts into single lifts.

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Note: For this function it is necessary to have at least 2 separate shaft bus cables with
.u

t.c

w
w
bus coupler CBC.
w

p
w

f
n

-li
w
Standby - - Activation of standby mode (for VVVF)
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

Note: The VVVF must either have an input to activate standby function or must be
t.c

p
w

n
w

connected by CANopen lift.

p

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Forc.stop off - - Input for enabling the lift after a forced stop (see "Special param." - "Forced stop")
t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
Telec.off - - Deactivation of all special functions initiated by remote control

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Gen.error - - General test input for error diagnosis.

t.c

p
w

n
w

If this input is activated, an error message is added to the error stack og the lift
p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

controller. No other reaction.

.u

t.c
-li

w
Force a reset of HSE and all other boards connected to control bus by input
Reset HSE - -
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Reset ESE - - Force reset of all ESE boards connected to shaft bus

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
With this signal one of three special texts (if using PMA) or pictures (if using LCD-047
w

Roll.text Signal no. -

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
or LCD-057) are activated on the display.
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
This text or pictures must be pre-defined and programmed by INTEC GmbH (if using
w

p
w

n
w

PMA) or may be created by PC software "LCDDesign" and downloaded to LCD-047 or

p

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w

LCD-057.
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w

The input function may be programmed to any input of the PMA, LCD-047 or LCD-057.
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
141/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
Main function Sub function/ Floor Doors Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Direction/

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Floor

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Attend.funct. Car attend. - - Activation/Deactivation of attendance mode (lift operator) by switch

.u

.c
-li

ft
w

p
Car att.push - - Activation/Deactivation of attendance mode (lift operator) by push

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Car att.off - - Push to deactivate attendance mode.
.u

.c

p
w

ft
This input can't be used to activate attendance mode
w

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
Button to select next travel direction

w
Call dir.up - -

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
w
Call dir.down - - See above

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Call bypass - - Call of actual floor is ignored as long as the button is pressed
.u

t.c

p
w
w
LC bypass - - Button to ignore landing calls. If lift stops in a floor landing calls are enabled

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

automatically.

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
Ignore LC - - Switch to ignore landing calls

p
w

n
w

w
f
n

.u
Button to clear and disable landing calls. If lift stops in a floor landing calls are enabled

t.c
LC off push - -

-li
w
.u

t.c

w
automatically.

w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Fire control Firemen run - - Activation of fire department trip

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

If this input is activated, the lift goes immediately to the programmed fire evacuation

w
Fire call Floor Doors

p
w

n
w

w
floor and opens the defined doors. Lift goes out of operation and door remain open.

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Fire evac. Signal no. - General fire detector

t.c

w
w
w
Note: With setting of "Signal no." up to 8 inputs may be programmed as "Fire evac"

p
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
Fire alarm Floor - Fire detector in specific floor

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
w
Fire return - - Input to return to normal operation even if fire

n
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

Firemen off - - Input to return to normal operation from firemen mode. Only possible if firemen run or
t.c
-li

w
w fire call is switched off.

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

Evacuation by UPS to next floor (depending onstate of input "Half load" - if exists)
n

UPS Evacuat. UPS evac. - -

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
See also "Special param." - "Evacuation"

p
w

n
w

p
w

f
UPS-brake - - Manually operated emergency evacuation by manual brake opening.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

If this input is activated the HSE changes to state display with actual speed (bar graph)
t.c
-li

w
w
and direction.

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u
Evac.active Evac.floor Doors Evacuation trip to the evacuation floor; programmed doors will be opened.

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
See also "Special param." - "Evacuation"

p
w
w

p
w

f
Note: If lift is moving in upward direction while this function is activated, the lift will stop
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

immediately if parameter “UPS Evacuation” – “Direct.” Is set to “downwards” (starting

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
with HSE software version 1.42l)
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
Evac.enable - - Start signal for evacuation trip

.c
w
.u

.c

w
(for evacuation sequence of several lifts).
p-

ft
w
w

ft

Evac.normal - - Input to switch back to normal operation even if "Evac.active" input is set.

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
142/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
Main function Sub function/ Floor Doors Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Direction/

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Floor

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Evacuation Evac.active - - Input to start evacuation mode according to EN81-76

.u

.c
-li

ft
w

p
Ev.enable CC - - Input for enabling car calls in evacuation mode

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Evac.stopped - - Input to stop evacuation mode
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w

p
Remote off Signal no. Floor Doors Remote switch off function. Up to 5 different functions (“Signal no.) are possible.
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u
First lift goes to the floor programmed with this input and opens the door. Second the lift

.c
-li
w

ft
w
goes to the floor programmed in „Special param. – Remote off“ and goes out of

p
w

ft

n
w

-li
w
operation.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Up to HSE software version 1.44r “Remote off” is a sub function of “Spec.func.”

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

Input to disable car calls for specified floor and doors.

f
Disable CC Floor - Doors

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Enable CC Floor - Doors Input to enable car calls for specified floor and doors.

w
w

p
w

n
w

w
Input to disable landing calls for specified floor and doors.

f
Disable LC - Floor Doors
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
w
w

p
Enable LC Dir.: Floor Doors Input to enable landing calls for specified floor and doors.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

- Up

w
.c

p
w

n
w

- Down
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
- Up+Dn

w
w

p
w

f
n
Visit.call 1 Call floor Targetfloor Doors in If this input is activated first the landing call for the specified "call floor" and "call

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

doors"is enabled for some seconds. If inside this time the landing call is pressed, the lift
t.c

w
Call- and

p
w

n
will go to this floor. If the lift arrives the call floor the car call for the specified target florr
w

f
n

.u
Target floor

t.c
-li
w
is enabled for some seconds.
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
See also "Special param." - "Visitor calls".
w

p
w

f
n
Note: On the sub parameter "Doors", both the doors for the landing call as well as for
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

the car call are set (doors for landing call displayed on the left side; doors for car call
.u

t.c

p
w

n
displayed on the right side).
w

p
w

f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
To set doors for the landing calls the keys 5, 6 and 7 are used, while keys 1, 2 and 3
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
are used to set the doors for the car call. To clear a door press same key again.
w

p
w

f
n
If this input is activated first a landing call in up direction is set to the call floor. If the lift
p

Vis.call2 up Call floor Targetfloor Doors in

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

reaches the call floor, the car call to the target floor is enabled for some time ( „Special
t.c

w
Call- and

p
w
w

param. – Visitor calls").

p
w

f
n

.u
Target floor

-li
w
f

See above how to set the doors for call floor and target floor.
.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w
See above; landing call in down direction is set.
Vis.call2 dn Call floor Targetfloor Doors in

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u
Call- and

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
Target floor
w
w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
143/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
Main function Sub function/ Floor Doors Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Direction/

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Floor

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Visit.call 3 Call floor Targetfloor Doors in If this input is activated first the landing call to the call floor is enabled for a certain time

.u

.c
-li

ft
(see „Special param. – Visitor calls"). If inside this time the landing call is pressed the

p
Call- and

ft

n
p

lift goes to this call floor. Once the call floor is reached the lift controller automatically

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
Target floor
.u

sets a car call to the target floor.

.c

p
w

ft
w See above how to set the doors for call floor and target floor.

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
Targ.call up Call floor Targetfloor Doors in If this input is activated first a landing call in up direction is set to the call floor. If the lift

.u

.c
-li
w

ft
reaches the call floor, the lift controller automatically sets a car call to the target floor.

p
Call- and

ft

n
w

-li
See above how to set the doors for call floor and target floor.

w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
Target floor
.u

t.c

p
w
w

p
Targ.call dn Call floor Targetfloor Doors in See above; landing call in down direction is set.
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Call- and

w
w

p
w

n
w

Target floor
p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
Vis.request Call floor - Doors Enables a call to the programmed floor and doors.

w
w

p
w

f
For more detailled description refer to "Special param. - Visitor floors" in chapter "menu

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
structure"

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

p
Special VIP Call floor - Doors If a special VIP call is activated, the lift serves this floor, but on the way to this floor the

n
w

w
f
n

.u
lift also serves all already stored car calls. New car calls are not accepted during this

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

w
times, while new landing calls will be stored but not served.

w
w

p
w

f
Once the lift arrives the target floor the next new car call is served as priority call

-li
w
f
n

.u
directly. After that the lift goes back to normal operation.

t.c
-li
w
t.c

p
w
Hazard.call Floor Doors Special control sequence for hazardous goods.

n
w

f
n

.u
Input to set a call for transportation of hazardous goods.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

If no separate door open push exists (Parameter „Hazard transport“ -> „Door input“ is

w
w

p
w

f
n
set to „no“)this input may also be used to open / close the doors if the lift is located in
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
the programmed floor.
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Additional settings see description of parameter set „Special param. - Hazard transport“

n
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Hazard.door Floor Doors Button to open or close the doors in hazardous transportation mode.

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
w Only for special car lifts with pallets: Call to get empty pallet or call to transport pallet to
Pallet call Call floor - Doors

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f

specified floor.
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Only for special car lifts with pallets: Sensor signal, if there is a pallet in the specified
t.c

Pallet state Floor - Door

p
w
w

floor at the specified door side.

w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

Pallet hook - Hook middle - - Only for special car lifts with pallets: Sensor signal for position of pallet hook
t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
w

n
- Hook end
w

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

- Hook mid.le
.c

w
p-

ft
w
w

ft

- Hook mid.ri
n

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
144/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
Main function Sub function/ Floor Doors Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Direction/

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Floor

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
- Hook end.le

.u

.c
-li

ft
w

p
- Hook end.ri

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
- Final limit
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w
Pallet test - Test on - - Only for special car lifts with pallets: Input signals for pallet test

p
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

- Pallet in

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
w

- Pallet out
p

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
Inspect. - On - - Control inputs for inspection control.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

If no slow input is programmed the lift always runs with normal inspection speed vI (see

w
- Up

p
w

n
parameter "Speed signals") in inspection mode; only in final floors the speed is reduced
w

w
f
n

.u
- Down

t.c
-li
to vIL.
w
.u

t.c

w
w
- Slow
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f
n

.u
Door test - - Input to start door test mode.

t.c
-li
w

w
.c

w
In door test mode it is possible to operate the doors with inspection switches

p
w

n
w

w
f
(Up/Down).
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Additional it is possible to start the door test mode by pressing inspection up and down
t.c

w
w
w

p
push together for at least 5s while inspection is switched on.
w

f
n

-li
w
f
n

.u
Shaftdr.test - Opening Floor Door Input to open an electric operated shaft door.

t.c
-li
w
t.c

w
The outputs to operate the shaft door must be assigned to an ESE.

p
w
- Closing

n
w

f
Additional end of safety circuit SK4 must be off and the lift must not be located inside
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c

the door zone of the assigned door

-li

w
w

p
w

Input for door zone switch SGM

f
Pos. SGM - -

n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w

SGO - - Input for upper door zone switch SGO

.u

t.c

p
w

n
w

p
w

Input for lower door zone switch SGU

f
SGU - -
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li

w
w

p
w

f
n
p

-li
w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
w

p
w

f
n

.u
-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

w
w

p
w

n
w

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w

VO - - Input for upper prelimit switch VOO

w

ft

li
w
.u

.c
li
w

p-
w
p-

ft

n
w

.u

.c
li
w
.u

.c

p-

ft
145/213
w
w

ft

li
w
n

.u

.c
li
w

p-
.c

w
p-

t
w

lif
ift

.u
 n

.u
li
w
.u

t.c

p-

w
w
w

w
lif
n

.u

t.c
w

p-
t.c

w
p-

w
INTEC GmbH

lif
n

.u
w
lif

.u

.c

p-

w
w
p-

t
Lift controller MLC 8000

w
lif
n

.u

.c
w
04/01/2021

.u

.c

w
p-

ft
w
w
Operating manual V2.0

ft

-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

p
w

ft

n
w

w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c

w
Main function Sub function/ Floor Doors Description

ft
w

p
w

ft

n
Direction/

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
.c

w
Floor

p
w

ft

n
w

p
ft

.u

.c
-li
w
VU - - Input for upper prelimit switch VOO

.u

.c
-li

ft
w

p
SGV - - Input for slow down switch SGS

ft

n
p

-li
w
n

.u

.c
-li
w
SGE - - Input for reference switch SGE
.u

.c

p
w

ft
w

p
Car light - - - Supervision input for car light power supply
w

ft

.u

.c
-li
w
.u

.c
-li
w

Load Zero load - - Car empty; used for call misuse detection

ft
w

p
w

ft
If the car is empty and more car calls than defined in parameter „Max. CC empty“ in

n
w

-li
w
n

.u

t.c
„Special param.“ -> „Anti nuisance“ are pressed, then all car calls will be cleared.

-li
w
.u

t.c

p
w
Half load - - Half of nominal load in cabin.
w

p
w

f
n

.u
This input is used for evacuation trip to next floor with battery supply.

-li
w
f

.u

t.c
-li
w

Depending of this input the lift either goes to floor abave or floor below.

w
w

p
w

n
w

Full load - - Cabin full; landing calls will be ignored.

p

w
f
n

.u

t.c
-li
w
.u

Overload - - Car overloaded; lift will not start any trip until input is switched off again.
t.c

w
w
w

p
The overload input will be ignored as long as the doors are closed and the lift is
w